2015 Jeep Wrangler (Includes Unlimited) Owner's Manual

User Manual: 2015-wrangler

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 695

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2015
OWNER’S MANUAL

Wrangler
Includes Wrangler Unlimited
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.

DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with
blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you
are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.

This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or
optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no
longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to
or improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.

WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

SECTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661

INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
! INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 ! WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
! ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 ! VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .8
! HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 ! VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .9

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4 INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and
perform tasks that conventional passenger cars are not
intended. It handles and maneuvers differently from
many passenger cars both on-road and off-road, so take
time to become familiar with your vehicle.

Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s
Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills
will improve with experience. When driving off-road or
working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect
the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics.
Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws
wherever you drive.

As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
The two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a
for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road collision. Refer to “On-Road/Off-Road Driving Tips” in
driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a “Starting And Operating” for further information.
four-wheel drive vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INTRODUCTION 5

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

ROLLOVER WARNING

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.

unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an
unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because
of the higher center of gravity and the narrower track, if
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- other vehicles may not.
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

6 INTRODUCTION

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:

Rollover Warning Label

Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In a
rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more
likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always
buckle up.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INTRODUCTION 7

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

8 INTRODUCTION

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.

The VIN is also stamped on either right or left hand side
of the engine block.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel pad, visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears underbody, on the right side of the
Vehicle Identification Number
frame rail near the center of the vehicle, as well as on the
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate.
Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a
window on your vehicle. Save this label for a convenient
record of your vehicle identification number and optional
equipment.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INTRODUCTION 9

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2

CONTENTS
! A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 ! ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .22
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 ! REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
! SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Remote Key Unlock On First Press . . .
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate . .
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Sound Horn On Lock . . . . . . . . . . . .
! VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .20
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock . .
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

. . . . . . .22
. . . . . . .24
. . . . . . .24
. . . . . . .25
. . . . . . .25
. . . . . . .26
. . . . . . .26

12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .27
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
! REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .29
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

▫ Upper Half Door Window Removal — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Upper Half Door Window Installation — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Front Door Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

▫ Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models)
▫ Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
! DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped . . . . .30
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ To Enter Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . .
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 ! WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
! DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

. . . . . .35
. . . . . .38
. . . . . .38
. . . . . .40
. . . . . .42
. . . . . .43

▫ Power Windows — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .43
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13

! REAR SWING GATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 ! ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .98
! OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .48 ! SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100

▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .63

▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS

Ignition Key Removal

The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has 1. Place the shift lever in PARK (if equipped with an
the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These
automatic transmission).
numbers can be used to order duplicate keys. Ask your
authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC (Accessory)
position.
safe place.
3. Push the key and cylinder inward and rotate the key to
the LOCK position.
4. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder.

Vehicle Key With RKE Transmitter
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15

WARNING!

Ignition Switch Positions
1 — LOCK
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)

3 — ON/RUN
4 — START

• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the Key Fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

SENTRY KEY®

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.

The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition engine.
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key.
NOTE: A key that has not been programmed is also
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position. ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17

During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
CAUTION!
switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatbulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
electronics. In addition, if the Vehicle Security Light Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that problems and loss of security protection.
someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine.
Either of these conditions will result in the engine being All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible by an authorized dealer.

Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a Sentry Key® is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Customer Key Programming

CAUTION!
Always remove the Sentry Keys® from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

If you have two valid Sentry Keys®, you can program
new Sentry Keys® to the system by performing the
following procedure:

1. Cut the additional Sentry Key® Transponder blank(s)
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is 2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn
the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position for at
required for authorized dealer replacement of keys. Duleast three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds.
plication of keys may be performed at an authorized
Then, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position
dealer or by following the customer key programming
and remove the first key.
procedure. This procedure consists of programming a
blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one 3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.
that has never been programmed.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
within 15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer Syssound. In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will
tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
authorized dealer.
position and remove the second key.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19

4. Insert a blank Sentry Key® into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
within 60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime
will sound. In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will
stop flashing. To indicate that programming is complete, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on again for
three seconds and then turn off.

NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the system’s memory. This will prevent the lost key from
starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be
reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an
authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed.

The new Sentry Key® is programmed. The Remote General Information
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be proThe Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15
grammed during this procedure.
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you subject to the following conditions:
do not have a programmed Sentry Key®, contact your
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
authorized dealer for details.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved NOTE: The Panic Alarm and the Vehicle Security Alarm
by the party responsible for compliance could void the are quite different. Please take a moment to activate the
Panic Alarm and the Vehicle Security Alarm to hear the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
differences in the horn. In case one should go off in the
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
future, you will need to know which mode has been
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors, activated in order to deactivate it.
swing gate, and ignition for unauthorized operation. Rearming The System
While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior
switches for door locks are disabled. The Vehicle Security If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
Alarm provides both audible and visible signals when disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
alarming. The horn will sound, the headlights will turn horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
on, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash repeat- after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
edly for three minutes. If the disturbance is still present rearm itself.
(driver’s door, passenger door, other doors, ignition) after To Arm The System
three minutes, the headlights, park lamps and/or turn
The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the
signals will flash for an additional 15 minutes.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to lock the doors
and swing gate, or when you use the power door lock
switch while the door is open. After all the doors are
locked and closed, the Vehicle Security Light (located on
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21

the instrument cluster) will flash rapidly for about 16
seconds to signal that the Vehicle Security Alarm is
arming. During this 16-second arming period, opening
any door or the swing gate will cancel the arming. If the
Vehicle Security Alarm is successfully set, the Vehicle
Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the
Vehicle Security Alarm is armed.
To Disarm The System

remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE
transmitter, once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed
(after 16 seconds), when you pull the door handle to exit,
the alarm will sound. If this occurs, push the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm. You may also accidentally disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm by unlocking the driver’s door
with the key and then locking it. The door will be locked
but the Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm.

To disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm, you will need to
push the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter, or NOTE:
turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. If • Unlocking the doors with the manual door lock plungsomething has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
ers or the driver’s door lock cylinder will not disarm
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
the Vehicle Security Alarm.
exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly. If you
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED

NOTE:

The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the • The front courtesy overhead console and door courRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
doors or open any door.
#Dome ON# position (extreme top position).
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the • The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur(extreme bottom position).
ther information.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds EQUIPPED
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
swing gate, and activate the Panic Alarm from a maximum distance of 66 ft (20 m) using a Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not
need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23

Three Button RKE Transmitter

Four Button RKE Transmitter

NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the Remote
Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled by performPush and release the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button
ing the following steps:
once to unlock the driver’s door only, or twice to unlock
all the doors and swing gate. When the RKE transmitter 1. Push and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
UNLOCK button is pushed, the Illuminated Entry will
RKE transmitter.
initiate and the turn signal lights will flash twice.
2. Continue to hold the RKE transmitter LOCK button
Remote Key Unlock On First Press
for at least four seconds, but not longer than 10
seconds, then push and hold the RKE transmitter
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
UNLOCK button.
the driver’s side, or all doors and swing gate on the first
To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate

push of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.

3. Release both buttons at the same time.

• For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle In- 4. Test this feature while outside of the vehicle by
formation Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
pushing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the RKE
Information
Center
(EVIC)/Personal
Settings
transmitter.
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25

NOTE: Pushing the RKE transmitter LOCK button while
you are inside of the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Push the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm.

To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors. The turn signals will flash and the
horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal.
Sound Horn On Lock

5. If the desired programming was not achieved or to This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
NOTE: Pushing the RKE transmitter LOCK button while proceed as follows:
you are inside of the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security • For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Push the
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “UnRKE transmitter UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vederstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inforhicle Security Alarm.
mation.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by pushing the PANIC button a second
following steps:
time, or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
1. Push the RKE transmitter LOCK button for 4 to 10
NOTE: When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pushing
seconds.
the PANIC button a second time, you may have to move
2. While the LOCK button is pushed (after four seconds),
closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of
push the RKE transmitter PANIC button. Release both
the system.
buttons.
To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock
The “Sound Horn On Lock” feature can be reactivated by
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
repeating this procedure.
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitUsing The Panic Alarm
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold the current setting, proceed as follows:
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated, • For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
the headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Unhorn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inforon.
mation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27

• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the The “Flash Lights With Lock” feature can be reactivated
following steps:
by repeating this procedure.
1. Push the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 Programming Additional Transmitters
seconds.
Refer to Sentry Key® “Customer Key Programming”.
2. While the UNLOCK button is pushed, (after four If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
seconds) push the RKE transmitter LOCK button. contact your authorized dealer for details.
Release both buttons.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
3. Test the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature outside of
the vehicle by pushing the RKE transmitter LOCK The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
button with the ignition switch in the LOCK position NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may apand the ignition key removed.
ply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
NOTE: Pushing the RKE transmitter LOCK button while 1. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use a
you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security
flat blade screwdriver to pry the two halves of the RKE
Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm
transmitter apart. Use extreme care not to damage the
activated will cause the alarm to sound. Push the RKE
seal or internal components.
transmitter UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.

• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Separating RKE Transmitter Halves

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.

2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause distance, check for these two conditions:
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
with rubbing alcohol.
the battery is a minimum of three years.
3. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29

2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station How To Use Remote Start
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB All of the following conditions must be met before the
radios.
engine will remote start:
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

• Shift lever in PARK

• Doors closed
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve- • Hood closed
niently from outside the vehicle while still • Hazard switch off
maintaining security. The system has a range of
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE:

• Ignition key removed from ignition switch

• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic • Battery at an acceptable charge level
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• RKE PANIC button not pushed
• Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter • System not disabled from previous remote start event
may reduce this range.
• Vehicle theft alarm not active
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped

WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.

The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar

• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low

• Remote Start Aborted — L/Gate Ajar

• Remote Start Aborted — System Fault

The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
to the ON/RUN position.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31

• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
Push and release the REMOTE START button
position before you can repeat the start sequence for a
on the RKE transmitter twice within five secthird cycle.
onds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking
lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur:
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
• The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
cycle.
• Any engine warning lamps come on

To Enter Remote Start

NOTE:

• The hood is opened

• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during • The hazard switch is pushed
Remote Start mode.
• The transmission is moved out of PARK
• For security, power window operation is disabled
• The brake pedal is pushed
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.

DOORS

CAUTION!
Careless handling and storage of the removable door
panels may damage the seals, causing water to leak
into the vehicle’s interior.

To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, insert the key into the ignition switch
and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN
position in order to drive the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33

Upper Half Door Window Removal — If Equipped
Grasp the half door window and pull upward.

Upper Half Door Window Installation — If
Equipped
1. Grasp the half door window and line up the pins with
the pockets in the lower door.
2. Push down to ensure the half door window is fully
seated.
Front Door Removal

WARNING!

Upper Half Door Window

Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
doors removed as you will lose the protection that
they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use
during off-road operation only.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Door Removal Warning Label

Hinge Pin Screw

3. Unplug the wiring harness connector under the instrument panel by pushing the tab at the base of the
2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower
connector and pulling down to disconnect.
outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx® head driver).
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage.

NOTE: The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in
the rear cargo tray located under the rear loadfloor.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35

4. Unhook the door strap from the body hook. Be careful
not to allow the door to swing fully open as the mirror
may damage the paint.
5. With the door open, lift the door to clear the hinge pins
from their hinges and remove the door.
NOTE: Doors are heavy; use caution when removing
them.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps in the
opposite order.
Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models)
Door Strap/Harness Location
1 — Wiring Harness (follow the harness up and under the instrument panel to the connector)
2 — Body Hook
3 — Door/Harness Strap

WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
doors removed as you will lose the protection that
they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use
during off-road operation only.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in
the rear cargo tray located under the rear loadfloor.

Door Removal Warning Label

1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage.
2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and
Hinge Pin Screw
lower outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx® head 3. Slide the front seat(s) fully forward.
driver).
4. Remove the trim access door from the bottom of the
B-pillar.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37

Trim Access Door

Connector Latched

5. Unplug the wiring harness connector.
NOTE: Squeeze the tab on the base of the connector. This
will unlock the connector tab, allowing the harness to be
disconnected.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps in the
opposite order.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
All doors are equipped with an interior rocker-type door
lock lever. To lock a door when leaving your vehicle,
push the rocker lever forward to the LOCK position and
close the door. To UNLOCK the door push the rocker
lever rearward.
Connector Unplugged

6. Unhook the door strap from the body hook.
7. With the door open, lift the door to clear the hinge pins
from their hinges and remove the door.
NOTE: Doors are heavy; use caution when removing
them.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39

Manual Door Lock (Full Frame Doors)

Manual Door Lock (Half Doors)

NOTE: The ignition key that is used to start the vehicle
is used to lock or unlock the doors, swing gate, glove
compartment, and console storage.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Power Door Locks — If Equipped

WARNING!
• For personal security reasons and safety in a collision, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as well
as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.

The power door lock switch is located on each front door
panel. Push the switch forward to lock the doors, and
rearward to unlock the doors.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Power Door Lock Switch

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41

Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped

The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer or through the Uconnect® Settings in
your radio.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit — If Equipped
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The “Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit” feature is
enabled.
2. The vehicle speed returned to 0 mph (0 km/h) and the
transmission shift lever is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
3. The driver door is opened.
4. The doors were not previously unlocked.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming

Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
The “Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit” feature can be Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
enabled or disabled as follows:
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON/
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
RUN and then back to LOCK four times ending up in
Door Lock System
the LOCK position.
1. Open the rear door.
3. Push the power door unlock switch to unlock the
2. Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and
doors.
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
programming.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Use the “Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit”
feature in accordance with local laws.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43

WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the rocker lever rearward (unlocked position), roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function

WINDOWS
Power Windows — If Equipped
The power window switches are located on the instrument panel below the radio. Push the switch downward
to open the window and upward to close the window.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:
• For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power
window switches will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the
LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature. The time for this feature is programmable.
Power Window Switches
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
The top left switch controls the left front window and the
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
top right switch controls the right front window.
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45

Four-Door Models

Window Lockout Switch — Four-Door Models

The lower left switch controls the left rear passenger The window lockout switch (located between the front
window, and the lower right switch controls the right window switches) allows you to disable the rear window
switches that are located on the back of the center floor
rear passenger window.
console. To disable the window controls, push the winAuto-Down
dow lockout button downward. To enable the window
Both the driver and front passenger window switches controls, push the window lockout button upward.
have an “Auto-Down” feature. Push the window switch
past the first detent, release, and the window will go
down automatically. To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in either the up or down
direction and release the switch.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
To partially open the window, push halfway to the first
detent and release it when you want the window to stop.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Power Windows — Four-Door Models
The rear passenger window switches are located on the
back of the center floor console. Push the switch downward to open the window and upward to close the
window.

Window Lockout Switch

Rear Power Window Switches (Four-Door Models)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47

Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized
by adjusting the window opening.

REAR SWING GATE
The rear swing gate can be unlocked by using the key,
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or by activating
the power door lock switches located on the front doors.

Gate Handle

To open the swing gate, push the button on the gate NOTE: Close the rear flip-up window before attempting
to close the swing gate (hard top models only).
handle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags

CAUTION!
Do not press on rear wiper blade when closing the
rear flip-up window, as damage to the blade will
result.

WARNING!
Driving with the flip-up window open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and
your passengers could be injured by these fumes.
Keep the flip-up window closed when you are operating the vehicle.

• Child Restraints

Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
Some of the most important safety features in your
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
vehicle are the restraint systems:
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
• Seat Belt Systems
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49

3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
seat belt properly (Refer to #Child Restraints#) should
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child
between you and the door and you could be injured.
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or belt9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
under #If You Need Assistance.#
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the
driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbelted,
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled.
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h) by blinking the Seat Belt
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of duration or until the respective seat belts are buckled.
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are buckled. The driver should instruct all other occube belted at all times.
pants to buckle their seat belts. If an outboard front seat
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than
(BeltAlert®)
5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and
BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the visual notification.
driver and outboard front passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger BeltAlert®) to buckle their
seat belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition
Seat Belt Systems

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51

The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may be triggered when an animal or
heavy object is on the outboard front passenger seat or
when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.

Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.

The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
BeltAlert® can be activated or deactivated by your au- vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
thorized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert®.
NOTE: If BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the
driver’s or outboard front passenger’s (if equipped with
BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unbuckled.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53

WARNING! (Continued)

• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.

• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

WARNING! (Continued)
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55

Pulling Out The Latch Plate

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle

3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed
position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Rear Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Retractor Lockout
This feature is designed to lock the retractor whenever
the rear seatback is not fully latched. This prevents
Positioning The Lap Belt
someone from wearing the rear center lap/shoulder belt
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
when the rear seatback is not fully latched.
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder NOTE:
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
• If the rear center lap/shoulder belt cannot be pulled
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
out, check that the rear seatback is fully latched.
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57

• If the rear seatback is properly latched and the rear
center lap/shoulder belt still cannot be pulled out, the
Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR) system may be
activated. To reset this feature you must let all of the
seat belt webbing return into the retractor. You will not
be able to pull out more webbing until all of the
webbing has been returned back into the retractor.

WARNING!
The rear center lap/shoulder belt is equipped with a
lockout feature to ensure that the rear seatback is in
the fully upright and locked position when occupied.
If the rear seatback is not fully upright and locked
and the rear center lap/shoulder belt can be pulled
out of the retractor, immediately take the vehicle to
your authorized dealer for service. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious injury or death.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180° to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that serves you
best.

Adjustable Anchorage

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59

NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.

WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
worn snugly and positioned properly.
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretenPregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take Energy Management Feature
the force if there is a collision.
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions that may
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

improve the performance of the seat belt by removing Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) — If Equipped
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be
work for all size occupants, including those in child
equipped with a switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
restraints.
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61

For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section of this manual. The graphics below
defines the type of feature for each seating position.

Four-Door Models

• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Two-Door Models

Only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so
as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow
the webbing to retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary
to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section.
Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
#click.#

WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.

In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic
Locking Mode is available on all passenger seating How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the
Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
feature. Children 12 years old and under should always
the entire seat belt is extracted.
be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63

How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.

WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light

• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• Knee Impact Bolsters

• Advanced Front Air Bags

• Supplemental Side Air Bags

• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners

• Seat Belt Buckle Switch

• Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bags

Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt 1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air Bag is 2 — Driver And passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words SRS
AIRBAG or AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65

Advanced Front Air Bag Features

WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.

The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.

WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel,
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bags to inflate.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colliAdvanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi- sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Ad- away from an inflating air bag.
vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Adof injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Ad- vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
collisions, including some that may produce substantial Advanced Front Air Bags.
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
severe initial deceleration.
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation

Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

outboard side of the seats. The SABs may help to reduce
the risk of occupant injury during certain side impacts, in
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occuseat belts and body structure.
pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
Knee Impact Bolsters

WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
Your vehicle is equipped with Supplemental SeatSupplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Location
Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) that are located in the
outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are marked When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outwith a SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG label sewn into the board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69

deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure you
if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
SABs are designed to activate in certain side impacts. The
Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) determines
whether the deployment of the SAB in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the severity and
type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.

The system is calibrated to deploy the SAB on the impact
side of the vehicle during impacts that require SAB
occupant protection. In side impacts, the SABs deploy
independently; a left side impact deploys the left SAB
only and a right side impact deploys the right side SAB
only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of
whether or not SABs should have deployed.
The SABs will not deploy in all side collisions, including
some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions
that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment.
SABs are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system.
SABs deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes.
Occupants, including children, who are up against or very
close to SABs can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or sleep against
the door, side windows, or area where the SABs inflate,
even if they are in an infant or child restraint.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
help keep you in position, away from an inflating SAB.
To get the best protection from the SABs, occupants must
wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.

WARNING!
• SABs need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
• Being too close to the SABs during deployment
could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the SABs alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The SABs work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, SABs won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belt even though you have SABs.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious to you, but
they will open during air bag deployment.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71

If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:

continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.

• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have dedeploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric- ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a bags will not be in place to protect you.
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
WARNING!
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immeparticles. The particles are a normal by-product of the diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air System serviced as well.
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye NOTE:
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
but they will open during air bag deployment.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an System Reset Procedure
authorized dealer immediately.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
Enhanced Accident Response System
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
OFF.
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine Air Bag Warning Light
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys- The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection
tem perform the following functions:
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with air bag
system electrical components.

• Cut off fuel to the engine.

• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” posiThe ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
tion.
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in
the battery has power or until the ignition switch is the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag
turned to the “OFF” position.
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
• Unlock the doors automatically.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73

The ORC contains a backup power supply system that free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or dealer service the air bag system immediately.
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
eight-second interval.
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
remains on while driving.
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
again after initial startup.
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc- the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection is detected that could affect the air bag system. The tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. system immediately.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Maintaining Your Air Bag System

WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.

WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was pushing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

These data can help provide a better understanding of Child Restraints
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a times, including babies and children.
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per- province, requires that small children ride in proper
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosare recorded. However, other parties, such as law en- ecuted for ignoring it.
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
crash investigation.
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is the rear seats rather than in the front.
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
WARNING!
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
vehicle or the EDR.
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77

WARNING! (Continued)
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.

Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:

• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
or call 1–866–SEATCHECK (732–8243). Canadian resichildren from newborn size to the child almost large
dents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for
enough for an adult seat belt. Always check the child seat
additional information:
Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat
for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instruc- • www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedriverstions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual
childsafety-index-53.htm
and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Infants and Toddlers

Small Children

Larger Children

Children Too Large for
Child Restraints

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Children who are at least two years old
or who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are
too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their booster seat
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79

Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.

WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their
rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing in
the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who are over two years old or who have outgrown the
rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain in a forwardfacing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to
the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.

WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.

WARNING! (Continued)
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81

Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not their stomach?

If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the seat belt
out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or
neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or
use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.

WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.

5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type

Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint

Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint

Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors
Tether Anchor
Only
+ Top Tether
Anchor
X
X
X
X

X
X

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83

Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH)
Restraint System

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle

Latch Positions (Four-Door Models)

Latch Positions (Two-Door Models)

Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
position
position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85

What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint?
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages?

Yes (4-Door Model
Only)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint.
You can install child restraints with flexible
lower anchors in the center position. The
inner anchorages are 19 inches (484 mm)
apart. Do not install child restraints with
rigid lower anchors in the center position.
Do not install a child restraint in the center
rear of a 2-Door model.

86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?

Yes

Can the head restraints be removed?

Yes (2-Door Model
only)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Head restraints cannot be removed in the
4-Door model.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87

Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.

Latch Anchorages (Two-Door Models)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Locating The Tether Anchorages
In addition, there are tether strap anchors located behind each rear seatback, near to the
floor.

Latch Anchorages (Four-Door Models)

Tether Strap Mounting (Two-Door Models)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89

tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH: Two Door

WARNING!
This vehicle does not have a center seating position.
Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to
install a child seat in the center of the back seat.
Center Seat LATCH: Four Door

Tether Strap Mounting (Four-Door Models)

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a

Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attachments in the center seating position. Only install this type
of child restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child
restraints with flexible, webbing mounted lower attachments can be installed in any rear seating position.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. If you are installing LATCHcompatible child restraints next to each other, you
must use the seat belt for the center position. You can
then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s
seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard
positions. Please refer to “Installing The LATCHCompatible Child Restraint System” for typical installation instructions.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint

2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.

1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto- 4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seatmatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
ing position.
belt following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91

5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.

How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt

• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.”

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle

Two-Door Models

Four-Door Models

• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger seat?

Weight limit of the Child Restraint

Can the head restraints be removed?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?

Yes (2-Door Model only)

Yes

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Head restraints cannot be removed
in the 4-Door model.
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR retractor.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95

5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webrear-most position to make room for the child seat.
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
to pass it through the seat belt path of the child restraint.
vehicle seat.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the seat belt path.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
“click”.
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.

tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one
is available.

9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by 2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
in any direction.
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
seat belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
side of the head restraint.
Anchorage:
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97

Tether Strap Mounting (Two-Door Models)

Tether Strap Mounting (Four-Door Models)

4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99

CAUTION!

WARNING!

Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.

NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Exhaust Gas

WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)

• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101

not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the
light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.

Defroster

Air Bag Warning Light

unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperFront seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
able.
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, Floor Mat Safety Information
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area

The light should come on and remain on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.

• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle

Door Latches

Tires

Fluid Leaks

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.

Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.

Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.

Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
! MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

▫ Cancel Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . . .111

▫ Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone to a Mobile
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .112
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .113
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .114
▫ Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
! Uconnect® PHONE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .115
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
▫ Help Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

▫ Dial by Saying a Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
▫ Call by Saying a Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Add Names to Your Uconnect® Phonebook . . .121
▫ Edit Uconnect® Phonebook Entries . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Delete Uconnect® Phonebook Entry . . . . . . . .123

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

! SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect® Phonebook
Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Front Seat Adjustment . . . . . . .
▫ List All Names in the Uconnect® Phonebook . . .124
▫ Manual Seat Height Adjustment
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .151
. . . . . . . . . . .152
—
. . . . . . . . . . .153

▫ Uconnect® Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

▫ Front Seatback Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154

▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .133

▫ Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat — Two-Door
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134

▫ Tip n’ Slide™ Seats — Two-Door Models . . . . .156

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145

▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .158

! VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .145

▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159

▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . .145

▫ Fold And Tumble Rear Seat — Two-Door Models
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161

▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151

▫ Removing The Rear Seat — Two-Door
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107

▫ Replacing The Rear Seat — Two-Door
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — Four-Door
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
! TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .165
! LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .167
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .168
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170

▫ Front Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Instrument Panel Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .171
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
! WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .174
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ Windshield Washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
! TILT STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
! ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180

▫ Rear Storage Compartment — If Equipped . . .191

▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 ! DUAL TOP — TWO-DOOR MODELS — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
▫ Removing The Soft Top — Two-Door Models .
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
▫ Installing The Soft Top — Two-Door Models
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
! DUAL TOP — FOUR-DOOR MODELS — IF
! ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET . . . . . . . . . . . .183
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
! POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .186
▫ Removing The Soft Top — Four-Door Models.
! CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
▫ Installing The Soft Top — Four-Door Models .
▫ Front Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
! FREEDOM TOP™ THREE-PIECE MODULAR
HARD TOP — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Rear Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189

. .192
. .192
. .194
. .196
. .196
. .199
. .203

! STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189

▫ Front Panel(s) Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204

▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189

▫ Freedom Top™ Storage Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207

▫ Console Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . .189

▫ Front Panel(s) Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109

▫ Front Panel(s) Installation With Rear Hard Top
Removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
▫ Rear Hard Top Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
▫ Rear Hard Top Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
! DOOR FRAME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
▫ Door Frame Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
▫ Door Frame Installation — Two-Door Models —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
▫ Door Frame Installation — Four-Door Models —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220

▫ Raising The Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
! SUNRIDER® (TWO-DOOR MODELS) . . . . . . . .252
▫ Opening The Sunrider® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
▫ Closing The Sunrider®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
! SOFT TOP — FOUR-DOOR MODELS . . . . . . . .255
▫ Quick Steps For Lowering The Soft Top . . . . . .258
▫ Quick Steps For Raising The Soft Top . . . . . . .263
▫ Folding Down The Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ Putting Up The Soft Top. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278

! SOFT TOP — TWO-DOOR MODELS . . . . . . . .223 ! SUNRIDER® (FOUR-DOOR MODELS) . . . . . . .288
▫ Quick Steps To Lowering The Soft Top . . . . . .225

▫ Opening The Sunrider® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288

▫ Quick Steps To Raising The Soft Top . . . . . . . .229

▫ Closing The Sunrider®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291

▫ Lowering The Soft Top. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 ! FOLDING WINDSHIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Lowering The Windshield And Removing
! REAR WINDOW FEATURES — HARD TOP
Side Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
▫ Raising The Windshield And Replacing
Side Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296

▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped . .297
▫ Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped . . . . . .298

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111

MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Adjusting Rearview Mirror

112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.

WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped

Outside Rearview Mirror

This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113

CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror switch is located on the center of the
instrument panel, below the climate controls. A rotary
knob selects the left mirror, right mirror or off position.
Automatic Dimming Mirror

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Vanity Mirrors
Vanity mirrors are located on the sun visors. To use the
mirrors, rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror
cover upward.

Power Mirror Switch

After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same
direction you want the mirror to move. Use the center off
position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror
position.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115

mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone.
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile,”
Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect® website for
supported phones. For Uconnect® customer support:
• U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call
1-877-855-8400.
• Canadian Residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or
call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983
(French).

Vanity Mirror

Uconnect® PHONE — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” $
“Mike” $ “Work” or “Dial” $ “248-555-1212”). Your

Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The Uconnect® Phone is driven through your
WARNING! (Continued)
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect® features Bluetooth® technology - the global laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your atstandard that enables different electronic devices to con- tention should be focused on safely operating the
nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
Uconnect® Phone works no matter where you stow your causing serious injury or death.
mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as Uconnect® Phone Button
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone. The Uconnect® Phone
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the
button and Voice Com(Uconnect® Phone
system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be
button) that will enable you to
mand
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
access the system. When you push the button you will
English, Spanish, or French languages.
hear the word Uconnect® followed by a BEEP. The
beep is your signal to give a command.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable

NOTE: The driver side upper windshield trim contains
the microphone for the Uconnect® Phone.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117

Voice Command Button

Operation

Actual button location may vary with the ra- Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
dio. The individual buttons are described in the Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
“Operation” section.
Uconnect® Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
The Uconnect® Phone can be used with any Hands-Free specific command and then guided through the available
Profile certified Bluetooth® mobile phone. See the options.
Uconnect® website for supported phones. Refer to your
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or another
details.
prompt.
The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone • For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
“Phone Pairing,” the following compound command
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
can be said: “Setup Phone Pairing.”
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from • For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound form of the voice command is given. You
the Uconnect® Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
can also break the commands into parts and say each
certain radios.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound form voice command “Phonebook New Entry,” or you can break the
compound form command into two voice commands:
“Phonebook” and “New Entry.” Please remember, the
Uconnect® Phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.

To activate the Uconnect® Phone from idle, simply push
the
button and follow the audible prompts for
directions. All Uconnect® Phone sessions begin with a
button on the faceplate.
push of the
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone to a Mobile Phone

Help Command

To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
To complete the pairing process, you will need to referthe beep. The Uconnect® Phone will play all the options
ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
at any prompt if you ask for help.
Uconnect® website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119

The following are general phone to Uconnect® Phone • You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
pairing instructions:
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile
button to begin.
• Push the
phones to your Uconnect® Phone. However, at any
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
given time, only one mobile phone can be in use,
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
connected to your Uconnect® System. The priority
allows the Uconnect® Phone to know which mobile
• When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Phone”
phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the
and follow the audible prompts.
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identiand priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
Uconnect® Phone will use the priority three mobile
enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to
after the initial pairing process.
“Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to Dial by Saying a Number
give the Uconnect® Phone a name for your mobile
button to begin.
• Push the
phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
given a unique phone name.
“Dial.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
• For example, you can say “234-567-8901.”

• The Uconnect® Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
• Push the

or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
Uconnect® Phonebook,” in the phonebook.
• The Uconnect® system will confirm the name and then
dial the corresponding phone number, which may
appear in the display of certain radios.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone

button to begin.

If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
“Call.”
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
Book Access Profile may support this feature. See
person you want to call.
Uconnect® website for supported phones.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• To call a name from downloaded (or Uconnect®)
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a
you can say “John Doe,” where John Doe is a previName” section.
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect® phonebook
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121

• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins • This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be
as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transmade to the Uconnect® Phone, for example, after you
ferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
start the vehicle.
phone connection.
• A maximum of 1,000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected Add Names to Your Uconnect® Phonebook
to the Uconnect® Phone.
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect® Phonebook is
• Depending on the maximum number of entries down- recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
button to begin.
• Push the
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previous downloaded phonebook is available • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook New Entry.”
for use.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile • When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recomphone is accessible.
mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
• Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
instead of “Bob.”
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phonebook.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., Edit Uconnect® Phonebook Entries
“Home,” “Work,” “Mobile,” or “Other”). This will
• Push the
button to begin.
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
book entry, if desired.
“Phonebook Edit.”
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
phonebook entry that you are adding.
entry that you wish to edit.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more • Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
main menu.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
The Uconnect® Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
phonebook entry that you are editing.
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
to the main menu.
supported by your phone, Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123

NOTE:
• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.

• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, push the
button while the
Uconnect® Phone is playing the desired entry and
say “Delete.”

“Phonebook Edit” can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a mobile
and a home number, but you can add “John Doe’s” work • After you enter the name, the Uconnect® Phone will
number later using the “Phonebook Edit” feature.
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
Delete Uconnect® Phonebook Entry
wish to delete.
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
when the vehicle is not in motion.
language is deleted.
button to begin.
• Push the
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
deleted or edited.
“Phonebook Delete.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect® Phonebook Entries

List All Names in the Uconnect® Phonebook

• Push the

button to begin.

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Erase All.”
“Phonebook List Names.”
• The Uconnect® Phone will ask you to verify that you • The Uconnect® Phone will play the names of all the
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phonebook entries, if available.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
button
deleted.
• To call one of the names in the list, push the
during the playing of the desired name, and say
NOTE:
“Call.”
• Only the phonebook in the current language is deleted.
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete”
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be operations at this point.
deleted or edited.
• The Uconnect® Phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
• The selected number will be dialed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125

Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect® Phone. Check with your
mobile service provider for the features that you have.

Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
button to place the current
mobile phone. Push the
call on hold and answer the incoming call.

NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys- only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the Making a Second Call While Current Call is in
button to accept the call. To reject the Progress
call. Push the
button until you hear a
call, push and hold the
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
push the
button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
rejected.
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call
is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

“Toggling Between Calls” in this section. To combine Conference Call
two calls, refer to “Conference Call” in this section.
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
button until you hear a
hold), push and hold the
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
To put a call on hold, push the
button until you hear
joined into one conference call.
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
bring the call back from hold, push and hold the Three-Way Calling
button until you hear a single beep.
To initiate three-way calling, push the
button while

a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as
described under “Making a Second Call While CurIf two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
rent Call is in Progress.” After the second call has
button until you hear a single beep,
push the
button until you
established, push and hold the
indicating that the active and hold status of the two
hear a double beep, indicating that the two calls have
calls have switched. Only one call can be placed on
been joined into one conference call.
hold at a time.

Toggling Between Calls

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING
Call
ContinuationTHE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127

Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily push the
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active
call. If the active call is terminated by the phone far
end, a call on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell phone-dependent. To bring the call
button until you
back from hold, push and hold the
hear a single beep.
Redial

Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
1. After the ignition is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect® Phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the Uconnect® Phone and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.

2. After the ignition is cycled to OFF, a call can continue
on the Uconnect® Phone for a certain duration, after
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
which the call is automatically transferred from the
“Redial.”
Uconnect® Phone to the mobile phone.
• The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that
3. An active call is automatically transferred to the
was dialed from your mobile phone.
mobile phone after the ignition is cycled to OFF.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect® Phone.
• Push the

button to begin.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Uconnect® Phone Features

Emergency Assistance

Language Selection

If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:

To change the language that the Uconnect® Phone is
using:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
button to begin.
• Push the
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
the name of the language you wish to switch to
follows:
English, Espanol, or Francais.
button to begin.
• Push the
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
language selection.
“Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will instruct
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number.
voice commands will be in that language.
This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE: After every Uconnect® Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is usable. The paired phone name is not languagespecific and usable across all languages.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129

NOTE:

WARNING! (Continued)

• The emergency number dialed is based on the country • paired to the Uconnect® System,
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and • and have network coverage.
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
be applicable with the available mobile service and area. Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance
• If supported, this number may be programmable on If you need roadside assistance:
some systems. To do this, push the
button and say
button to begin.
• Push the
“Setup,” followed by “Emergency.”
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your
“Towing Assistance.”
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
NOTE: You should program the desired Towing Assisfor the mobile phone directly.
tance phone number using the Voice Command system.
button and say “Setup,” folTo do this, push the
WARNING!
lowed by “Towing Assistance.” When prompted say
To use your Uconnect® Phone System in an emer- 1-800-521-2779 for U.S./Canada, say 55-14-3454 for
gency, your mobile phone must be:
Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
• turned on,
City in Mexico.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Paging
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated
Systems.” Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the Uconnect® Phone.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
with Automated Systems.”
Working with Automated Systems

When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can push the
button and say the sequence you wish to enter,
followed by the word “Send.” For example, if required
to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #),
you can push the
button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send.”
Saying a number, or sequence of numbers, followed
by “Send,” is also to be used for navigating through an
automated customer service center menu structure,
and to leave a number on a pager.

This method is used in instances where one generally has You can also send stored Uconnect® Phonebook entries
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
navigating through an automated telephone system.
button and say, “Send.” The
call and then push the
You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail
system will prompt you to enter the name or number
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to
or automated customer service line. Some services require immediate response selection. In some instances,
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131

send. The Uconnect® Phone will then send the corre- Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
sponding phone number associated with the phone- Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
book entry, as tones over the phone.
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect® Phone
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
NOTE:
button to begin.
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone • Push the
network configurations. This is normal.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say:
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
• “Setup Confirmations Prompts On”
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
• “Setup Confirmations Prompts Off”
use of this feature.
Phone And Network Status Indicators
Barge In – Overriding Prompts
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice your mobile phone, the Uconnect® Phone will provide
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is notification to inform you of your phone and network
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you status when you are attempting to make a phone call
button and say, “Pair a Phone” to using Uconnect® Phone. The status is given for roaming,
could push the
select that option without having to listen to the rest of network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
the voice prompt.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad

Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)

You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth® mobile
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicles
audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.

When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. To
mute the Uconnect® Phone:
• Push the

button.

• Following the beep, say “Mute.”

To un-mute the Uconnect® Phone:
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
button.
• Push the
dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa- • Following the beep, say “Mute off.”
tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133

Advanced Phone Connectivity

List Paired Mobile Phone Names

Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone

• Push the

button to begin.

The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans- • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
• When prompted, say “List Phones.”
from your Uconnect® Phone paired mobile phone to the
button • The Uconnect® Phone will play the phone names of all
Uconnect® Phone or vice versa, push the
and say “Transfer Call.”
paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the
lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
button and say “Sebeing announced, push the
Uconnect® Phone and Mobile Phone
lect” or “Delete.” Also, see the next two sections for
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
an alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a paired
electronic devices, but can only be actively #connected#
phone.
with one electronic device at a time.
Select Another Mobile Phone
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth®
This feature allows you to select and start using another
connection between a Uconnect® Phone paired mobile
phone paired with the Uconnect® Phone.
phone and the Uconnect® Phone, follow the instructions
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
button to begin.
• Push the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

button at any time while
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • You can also push the
the list is being played, and then choose the phone
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
you wish to delete.
button at any time while
• You can also push the
the list is being played, and then choose the phone Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
that you wish to select.
Phone
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone Uconnect® Phone Tutorial
call. If the selected phone is not available, the To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, push the
Uconnect® Phone will return to using the highest
button and say “Uconnect® Tutorial.”
priority phone present in or near (approximately
Voice Training
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect®
• Push the
button to begin.
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say training mode, follow one of the two following procedures:
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
Delete Uconnect® Phone Paired Mobile Phones

• At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the • From outside the Uconnect® Phone mode (e.g., from
button for five
radio mode), push and hold the
prompts.
seconds until the session begins, or,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135

• Push the
button and say the “Voice Training,” This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
“System Training,” or “Start Voice Training” com- and other settings in all language modes. The System will
prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
mand.
You can either push the Uconnect® Phone button to Voice Command
restore the factory setting or repeat the words and
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
phrases when prompted by the Uconnect® Phone. For
provide at least ½ inch (1 cm) gap between the
best results, the Voice Training session should be comoverhead console (if equipped) and the mirror.
pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine
running, all windows closed, and the blower fan • Always wait for the beep before speaking.
switched off.
• Speak normally without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
you.
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Reset
• Push the

button.

• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.

Performance is maximized under:
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• Low-to-medium blower setting
“Setup,” then “Reset.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• Low-to-medium vehicle speed

• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
in the Uconnect® Phonebook.

• Smooth road surface

• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect® Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.

• Dry weather condition

• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred.”

• Low road noise

• Fully closed windows
NOTE:

• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac- • Even though international dialing for most number
cents, the system may not always work for some.
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
• When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send.”
compromised with the convertible top down.
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137

Far End Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting

• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down
Recent Calls

• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed

If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Download,” Uconnect® Phone can list your Outgoing, Incoming and Missed Calls.

• Smooth Road Surface

Voice Text Reply

• Low Road Noise

• Fully Closed Windows

• Dry Weather Conditions

• Operation From The Driver’s Seat

Uconnect® Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.
Read Messages:

If you receive a new text message while your phone is
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness connected to Uconnect® Phone, an announcement will
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
not the Uconnect® Phone
If you wish to hear the new message:
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced • Push the
button.
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

button while the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say To send a message, push the
system is listing the message and say “Send.”
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
• Uconnect® Phone will play the new text message for Uconnect® Phone will prompt you to say the name or
number of the person you wish to send the message to.
you.
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward” List of Preset Messages:
the message using Uconnect® Phone.
1. Yes
Send Messages:
2. No
You can send messages using Uconnect® Phone. To send
3. Where are you?
a new message:
4. I need more direction
button.
• Push the
5. L O L
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Send” or “Send Messages.”
6. Why
• You can either say the message you wish to send or say 7. I love you
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
8. Call me
9. Call me later
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139

10. Thanks

Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF

11. See you in 15 minutes

Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop
the system from announcing the new incoming messages.

12. I am on my way
13. I’ll be late

• Push the

button.

15. Where are we meeting?

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup, Incoming Message Announcement,” you will
then be given a choice to change it.

16. Can this wait?

Bluetooth® Communication Link

17. Bye for now

Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth® ON mode.

14. Are you there yet?

18. When can we meet?
19. Send number to call
20. Start without me

Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143

Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location

Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
all
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
help
home
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing
pairing
phonebook
phone book

Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
previous
record again
redial
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect® Tutorial
voice training
work
yes
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145

General Information

VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Voice Command System Operation
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
The Uconnect® Voice Command system allows
you to control your AM, FM radio, disk player,
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
USB mass storage class device, iPod® family of
the party responsible for compliance could void the
devices, Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device,
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
satellite radio, and a memo recorder.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System
• This device must accept any interference received,
as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the
including interference that may cause undesired opVoice Interface System to recognize user voice commands
eration.
may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised
voice level.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.

Pushing the Voice Command
button while the
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The
system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can
add or change commands. This will become helpful
once you start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel,”
“Help” or “Main Menu.”

These commands are universal and can be used from any
button, you menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
When you push the Voice Command
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a the active application.
command.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few a normal speaking volume.
seconds, the system will present you with a list of
The system will best recognize your speech if the winoptions.
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning blower
If you would like to interrupt the system while it lists is set to low.
button, listen
options, push the Voice Command
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
for the beep, and say your command.
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147

To hear the first available Menu, push the Voice Com- Main Menu
button and say “Help” or “Main Menu.”
mand
Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to
Commands
the main menu.
The Voice Command system understands two types of
commands, Universal commands and Local commands. In this mode, you can say the following commands:
Universal commands are available at all times. Local
• “Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode)
commands are available if the supported radio mode is
active.
• “Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode)
Changing The Volume

• “Sat” (to switch to Satellite radio mode)

1. Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command •
button.
•
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
•
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command
•
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for
Voice Command is different than the audio system.
•

“Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
“USB” (to switch to USB mode)

“Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth®
Streaming mode)
“Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
“System Setup” (to switch to system setup)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Radio AM

• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)

To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM.” In • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
Satellite Radio
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio.” In this mode, you may say the following com• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
mands:
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
spoken number)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
Radio FM
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM.” In
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)

• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)

• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149

• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)

Disc Mode

To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc.” In this mode, you • “Play” (to play an Artist Name, Playlist Name, Album
may say the following commands:
Name, Track Name, etc.)
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)

Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) Mode
To switch to Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) mode, say
“Bluetooth Streaming.” In this mode, you may say the
following commands:

• “Next Track” (to play the next track)

• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)

• “Play” (to play the current track)

USB Mode

To switch to USB mode, say “USB.” In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)

• “Pause” (to pause the current track)

• “Next Track” (to play the next track)

• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Memo Mode

– “Previous” (to play the previous memo)

To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo.” In
this mode, you may say the following commands:

– “Delete” (to delete a memo)

– “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the Setup
recording, you may push the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by say- To switch to system setup, you may say one of the
following:
ing one of the following commands:
• “Change to setup”
– “Save” (to save the memo)
– “Continue” (to continue recording)
– “Delete” (to delete the recording)

• “Switch to system setup”
• “Main menu setup”

• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) — • “Switch to setup”
During the playback you may push the Voice Com- In this mode, you may say the following commands:
button to stop playing memos. You promand
• “Language English”
ceed by saying one of the following commands:
– “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
– “Next” (to play the next memo)

• “Language French”

• “Language Spanish”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151

parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the
last trained voice only.

• “Tutorial”

• “Voice Training”

NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to push the Voice
button first and wait for the beep
Command
SEATS
before speaking the “Barge In” commands.
Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
Voice Training
vehicle.
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect®
WARNING!
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
button, say “System
1. Push the Voice Command
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
“Voice Training.” This will train your own voice to
or killed.
the system and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect® Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Front Seat Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a
bar located by the front of the seat cushion, near the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under
the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Manual Seat Adjustment

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153

Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped

WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.

The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using
the ratcheting handle, located on the outboard side of the
seat. Pull upward on the handle to raise the seat; push
downward on the handle to lower the seat.

Seat Height Adjustment
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Front Seatback Recline
Lean forward before lifting the handle, then lean back to
the desired position and release the handle. Lift the
handle to return the seatback to an upright position.

WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.

Recline Lever

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155

Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat — Two-Door
Models
Pull upward on the recline lever (toward the rear of the
vehicle) and slide the entire seat forward.

Easy Entry Seat

To return the seat to a sitting position, rotate the seatback
upright until it locks and push the seat rearward until the
track locks.
Easy Entry Lever

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:
• The front passenger seats have a track memory, which
returns the seat to just past the halfway point of the
track regardless of its original position.
• The recliner and easy entry levers should not be used
during the automatic returning of the seat to its sitting
position.
Tip n’ Slide™ Seats — Two-Door Models
This feature allows the front seats to be rotated toward
the instrument panel to allow easier entry into the rear
seats.
Driver’s Seat
Pull upward on the recline lever and bring the seatback
to its full forward position.

Recline Lever

Rotate the entire seat assembly toward the instrument
panel.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157

Pull upward on the recline lever and slide the entire seat
forward (Easy Entry).

Tip n’ Slide™

Passenger Seat
Easy Entry Lever

In addition to Easy Entry, the front passenger seat is also
equipped with Tip n’ Slide™. This feature allows for With the seat forward, pull the entire seat assembly
toward the instrument panel.
easier entry for rear passengers.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

controls for each seat are located on a switch bank near
the bottom center of the instrument panel.
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of
Heated Seats — If Equipped
operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected, the
may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions system will automatically switch to LOW-level after
approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation. At
and seatbacks.
that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
Tip n’ Slide™

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159

two to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting
will turn OFF automatically after approximately 30 minutes.
NOTE: When a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.

WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Front Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
Adjustment Button
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the adjustRear
Head
Restraints
— 2 Door Model
ment button, located on the base of the head restraint,
and push downward on the head restraint.
The rear seat is equipped with adjustable head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the adjustment button, located on the base of the head restraint,
and push downward on the head restraint. Refer to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161

“Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Start- 1. Lift the seatback release lever and fold the seatback
forward.
ing Your Vehicle” for information on child seat tether
routing.
Rear Head Restraints — 4 Door Model
The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable head restraints. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things to
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for information on
child seat tether routing.

Fold And Tumble Rear Seat — Two-Door Models
NOTE:
• Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
reposition the front seats.

Rear Seat Release

• Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and 2. Slowly flip the entire seat forward.
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold
down easily.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Removing The Rear Seat — Two-Door Models

WARNING!

Folding Rear Seat

3. Return the seat to the normal position.
4. Raise the rear seatback using the assist strap and
firmly lock the seat into position.

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could
be injured if seats are not properly latched to their
floor attachments. Always be sure that the seats are
fully latched.
1. Fold the rear seat forward following steps 1 and 2
under “Fold And Tumble Rear Seat” in this section.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163

2. Press down on the release bar on each side, and pull Replacing The Rear Seat — Two-Door Models
the seat out and away from the lower bracket.
Reverse the steps for removing the seat.
3. Remove the seat from the vehicle.

WARNING!

• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area with the
rear seat folded down or removed from the vehicle.
• The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers who should sit in
seats and use seat belts.
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — Four-Door Models
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat to allow for extended cargo space.
Release Bar Location

NOTE:
• Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
reposition the front seat to its mid-track position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and To Fold Down The Rear Seat
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold Locate the release lever (upper outboard side of seat), and
down easily.
lift it upward until the seatback releases.

WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Release Levers

Slowly fold down the seatback.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165

To Raise The Rear Seat

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD

Raise the seatback and lock it into place. If interference Release both the hood latches.
from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully
locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its
proper position.
NOTE: If the rear seatback is not fully latched, the center
shoulder belt will not be able to be extended for use. If
you cannot extend the center shoulder belt, make sure
your seatback is fully latched.

WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback in not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.

Hood Latch

Raise the hood and locate the safety latch, located in the
middle of the hood opening. Push the safety latch to the
left side of the vehicle, to open the hood. You may have

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

to push down slightly on the hood before pushing the LIGHTS
safety latch. Insert the support rod into the slot on the
Multifunction Lever
hood.
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the
To close the hood, remove the support rod from the hood parking lights, headlights, headlight beam selection,
panel and place it in the retaining clip. Lower the hood passing light, fog lights, instrument panel light dimming
slowly. Secure both of the hood latches.
and turn signals. The multifunction lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.

WARNING!

Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167

Headlights And Parking Lights
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
for parking light operation. Turn to the second detent for
headlight operation.

Multifunction Lever

Headlight Switch

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
turn the end of the multifunction lever to the AUTO
position (third detent). When the system is on, the
Headlight Time Delay feature is also on. This means the
headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK position. To turn the
Automatic System off, turn the end of the multifunction
lever out of the AUTO position.
Headlight Switch

NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will turn on in the Automatic mode.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169

NOTE:

Turn Signals

Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows • If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• A tone will chime if the turn signals are left on for more
than 1 mile (2 km).
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Lights-On Reminder
Turn Signal Operation

If the headlights or parking lights are left on after the
ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the
driver when the driver’s door is opened.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the parking
lights or the headlights on low beam. Selecting high
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you, to
switch the headlights back to low beam.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
High/Low Beam Switch

Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is door is opened.
released.
Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights when the parkFront Fog Lights
ing lights or headlights are on.
Flash-To-Pass

Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next
The front fog light switch is located on the multidetent position to brighten the odometer and radio when
function lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn
the parking lights or headlights are on.
on the parking or low beam headlights and pull out the
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last
end of the lever.
detent to turn on the interior lighting.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171

Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The headlights come on at a low intensity level when
shifted into any position other than PARK (auto transmission) or when the vehicle begins to move (manual
transmission).
NOTE: The Daytime Running Light on the same side of
the vehicle as the active turn signal will turn off automatically when a turn signal is in operation and turn on
again when the turn signal is not operating.
Interior Lights
Dimmer Control

The overhead light will turn on when a door is opened. It
may also be turned on by rotating the control for the
dimmer switch on the multifunction lever fully upward.
The overhead light will automatically turn off in approximately 10 minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer
control is left in the dome light position. Turn the ignition
switch ON to restore the overhead light operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Courtesy/Reading Lights
Two courtesy/reading lights are located in the bottom of
the rearview mirror. You can turn these lights on and off
from the switches in the mirror or from the dimmer
control in the multifunction lever. These lights are also
controlled automatically by the Illuminated Entry System.

Courtesy/Reading Light Switches

A courtesy light is also found in the rear of the center
console. You can turn this light on and off from the
dimmer control in the multifunction lever. This light is
also controlled automatically by the Illuminated Entry
System.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173

Cargo Lamp
The courtesy and dome lights will turn on when the front
doors are opened, by rotating the control for the dimmer
switch on the multifunction lever fully upward, or if
equipped, when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

The sports bar reading lights (available on four-door
models) can be turned on by pressing the switches,
located on either side of the lens. Press a switch a second
time to turn the light off.
Sports Bar Reading Light

The rear cargo light may be turned on by pressing the
lens. Press the lens a second time to turn the light off.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on
the right side of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located at the end of the
lever. For information on using the rear window wiper/
washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.

Rear Cargo Light

When a door is open and the interior lights are on,
rotating the dimmer control to the extreme bottom position will cause all the interior lights to turn off. This is
also known as the “Party” mode because it allows the
doors to stay open for extended periods of time without
discharging the vehicle’s battery.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175

Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third
detent past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper
operation.

Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever

Front Wiper Control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on
and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to
the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause beFront Wiper Control
tween cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the lever to the
NOTE:
The
wiper
delay times depend on vehicle speed.
first detent position for one of five intermittent settings.
If
the
vehicle
is
moving
less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
The delay cycle can be set anywhere between 1 to 18
delay
times
will
be
doubled.
seconds.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177

Windshield Washers

Mist Feature

To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold
while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the
delay range, the wiper will start and continue to operate for
two or three wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.

Push down on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to
clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. As
long as the lever is held down, the wipers will continue
to operate.

NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
will operate for two or three wipe cycles and then turn windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
off.
spray the windshield with washer fluid.

WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during windshield washer use.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Push down on the lever to unlock the steering column.
With one hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the
steering column up or down, as desired. Pull upwards on
the lever to lock the column firmly in place.

Mist Control

TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt lever is located on the
steering column, below the turn signal lever.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Tilt Steering Column Lever

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179

WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).

Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF

The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the 2 — RES +
right side of the steering wheel.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3 — SET 4 — CANCEL

180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.

WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.

To Activate

To Set A Desired Speed

Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.

Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET (-) button.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181

To Deactivate

The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the U.S. Speed (mph)
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with• Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
out erasing the set speed from memory.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
To Resume Speed
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed Metric Speed (km/h)
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
• Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a
To Vary The Speed Setting
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
To Increase Speed

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in- • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
the new set speed will be established.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can dethe new set speed will be established.
crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen To Accelerate For Passing
To Decrease Speed

speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)

Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
• Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
continue to decrease until the button is released, then speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
the new set speed will be established.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
• Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
Control.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
Metric Speed (km/h)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183

WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET
There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) auxiliary power outlets
that can provide power for accessories designed for use
with the standard power outlet adapters.

Front Power Outlet

When the optional cigar lighter heating element is used
The front power outlet is located in the center of the in the power outlet, it heats when pushed in and pops out
instrument panel below the climate controls, and is automatically when ready for use. To preserve the heatpowered from the ignition switch. Power is available ing element, do not hold the lighter in the heating
when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position. position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

A second power outlet is located inside the center console On vehicles equipped with a rear subwoofer, there is a
and is powered directly from the vehicle battery.
third power outlet located in the right rear cargo area.

CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Rear Power Outlet — If Equipped

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185

WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
2 — M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
3 — M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Rear with Sub Woofer (Opt.)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., mobile phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high-power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.

• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
front of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187

may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually push the power inverter button OFF and ON.
To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
The power inverter switch is located
on the instrument panel below the
climate controls. To turn on the power
outlet, push the switch once. The indicator light will illuminate. Push the
switch a second time to turn the power
inverter outlet off.
Power Inverter
NOTE: When the power inverter switch is pushed, there
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload will be a delay of approximately one second before the
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, inverter indicator light turns ON.
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CUPHOLDERS

WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.

Front Cupholders
The front cupholders are located in the center console.

Front Cupholders

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189

Rear Cupholders

STORAGE

The rear cupholders are located on the back of the center
console.

Glove Compartment
The lockable glove compartment is located on the passenger side of the lower instrument panel. Pull outward
on the handle/latch to open the glove compartment.
Console Storage Compartment
To lock or unlock the storage compartment, insert the
ignition key and turn. To open the storage compartment,
press the latch and lift the cover.

Rear Cupholders

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Center Console

Center Console Lid Storage

There is an extra storage area underneath the console lid.
The console lid has an integrated paper clip feature that
can hold small items.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191

Rear Storage Compartment — If Equipped
The rear cargo area storage compartment cover is held by
a spring-loaded latch. In order to remove the rear storage
compartment cover, use the following procedure:
NOTE: The rear storage compartment latch should not
be used as cargo tie-down.

1. Flip up the pull loop so it is perpendicular (straight
up) to the top surface of the tray.
2. Pull up on the loop and twist it 90 degrees, so it is
parallel to the slotted hole in the tray.
Rear Storage Cover

3. Open the rear compartment cover.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

DUAL TOP — TWO-DOOR MODELS — IF
EQUIPPED

Removing The Soft Top — Two-Door Models

If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top, you must
remove one of the tops from the vehicle. If the soft top
is removed, the pivot brackets must also be removed
from the sport bar. The soft top was installed at the
factory for shipping purposes only. The soft top and the
hard top are to be used independently. Removal is
mandatory to prevent any possible wear and tear on the
soft top. Your vehicle warranty will not cover damage
resulting from both tops remaining on the vehicle at the
same time for extended periods of time.

1. Locate and remove the two boxes that contain the
following items:
• Right and left door frames
• Four door frame attachment knobs
• Right and left quarter windows
• Rear window
• Two rear window roll up straps
• Two Sunrider® secure straps (if equipped)
• Two rear swing gate brackets

2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top™ ThreePiece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Removal” in this section.
3. Remove the soft top bow assembly pivot bracket
screws (two per side) using a #T30 Torx® head driver.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193

4. Disconnect the knuckles from the left and right metal 5. Unzip the zipper on the sport bar cover to expose the
pivot brackets. Remove the soft top from the vehicle
pivot brackets. Remove the brackets using a #T30 Torx®
and store in a clean, dry location.
head driver. Recover and re-zip the sports bar cover.
Store the pivot brackets and screws in a safe place.
NOTE: To aid in disconnecting the knuckles, you may
6. Reinstall the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top™ Threecarefully tap on the knuckles using a rubber mallet.
Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Installation” in this section.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

4. If the soft top has been removed, follow these steps to
reinstall the soft top. If the soft top is on the vehicle,
NOTE: The following procedures are for first time set up
proceed to step #5.
only. For future soft top procedures, refer to “Soft Top” in
a. If the pivot brackets have been removed, unzip the
this section.
sport bar covers and attach the pivot brackets to the
1. Locate and remove the following items prior to hard
sports bar with the four screws that were removed
top removal:
using a #T30 Torx® head driver. Re-cover and
• Right and left door frames
re-zip the sport bar covers.
• Door frame attachment knobs (four for two-door
b. Lay the soft top into the rear of the vehicle with the
models, six for four-door models)
bows pointing forward and the curved portion of
• Right and left quarter windows
the bows facing upward.
• Rear window
c. Reattach the knuckles onto the metal pivot brackets.
Installing The Soft Top — Two-Door Models

2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top™ Three- NOTE: To aid in reattaching the knuckles, you may
Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Re- carefully tap on the knuckles using a rubber mallet.
moval” in this section.
d. Screw the pivot screws back into place using a #T30
3. Install the door frames. Refer to “Door Frame” in this
Torx® head driver. Secure them until they are snug,
section.
being careful not to cross-thread the screws or
overtighten.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195

CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the
screws if they are overtightened.
5. Remove the swing gate bar (black metal bar for
bottom of rear window) and set aside.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Be sure the wire harness in the left rear corner is mandatory to prevent any possible wear and tear on the
not tangled in the soft top bows before you lift the top. soft top. Your vehicle warranty will not cover damage
resulting from both tops remaining on the vehicle at the
6. Unsnap and remove the black boot cover. This cover
same time for extended periods of time.
should be discarded. It was intended as a protective
Removing The Soft Top — Four-Door Models
cover for shipping only.
NOTE: A visual instruction sheet is enclosed in the dual 1. Locate and remove the two boxes that contain the
following items:
top wrap.
• Right and left door frames
7. Put up the soft top. Refer to “Soft Top — Putting Up
• Six door frame attachment knobs
The Soft Top” in this section.
• Right and left quarter windows
DUAL TOP — FOUR-DOOR MODELS — IF
• Rear window
EQUIPPED
• Two rear window roll up straps
If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top, you must
• Two Sunrider® secure straps (if equipped)
remove one of the tops from the vehicle. If the soft top
• Two rear swing gate brackets
is removed, the pivot brackets must also be removed
from the sport bar. The soft top was installed at the 2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top™ Threefactory for shipping purposes only. The soft top and the
Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Rehard top are to be used independently. Removal is
moval” in this section.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197

3. Ensure the tether strap is secure to the pivot bracket.
Unbutton the side bow tether strap (both sides).

5. The tether strap must be hooked onto the pivot
bracket prior to removal of soft top from vehicle (both
sides).
4. Using the plastic reinforcement as a handle, slide the
tether strap up the side bow (both sides).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

6. Remove the soft top bow assembly pivot bracket bolts 8. Remove the soft top from the vehicle and store in a
(two per side) from the sport bar using a 10.0 mm
clean, dry location (another person may be needed to
wrench or socket driver.
help with this operation).
7. Lift the soft top in a upward motion to release the NOTE: If you are doing this alone, use one arm to hold
pivot bracket from the sport bar bracket.
the bundle up, the other to remove the brackets.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199

Installing The Soft Top — Four-Door Models
NOTE: The following procedures are for first time set up
only. For future soft top procedures, refer to “Soft Top” in
this section.
1. Locate and remove the following items prior to hard
top removal:
• Right and left door frames
• Six door frame attachment knobs
• Right and left quarter windows
• Rear window

9. Reinstall the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top™ Three- 2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top™ ThreePiece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel InstalPiece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Relation” in this section.
moval” in this section.
3. Install the door frames. Refer to “Door Frame” in this
section.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

4. Install the soft top with the pivot brackets above the
sport bar brackets, lower the soft top into the sport bar
bracket slots in a downward motion to lock tab on soft
top. You will need to lift the top to get the brackets to
line up. (Another person may be needed to help with
this operation.)
NOTE: If you are doing this alone, use one arm to hold
the soft top up, the other to align the brackets.

5. Lower the pivot bracket onto the sport bar bracket
mounting tab in a downward motion to lock into tab.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201

CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the
screws if they are overtightened.
7. Remove the tether strap from the pivot bracket.

6. Install the pivot bracket bolts back into place using a
10.0 mm wrench or socket driver. Secure them until
they are snug, being careful not to cross-thread the
screws or overtighten.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

8. Using the plastic reinforcement as a handle remove the
tether strap from the bracket hook by sliding strap up
off hook and slide down the side bow (both sides).

10. Remove the swing gate bar (black metal bar for
bottom of rear window) and set aside.
9. Button the side bow tether strap (both sides).

NOTE: Be sure the wire harness in the left rear corner is
not tangled in the soft top bows before you lift the top.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203

11. Unsnap and remove the black boot cover. This cover FREEDOM TOP™ THREE-PIECE MODULAR
should be discarded. It was intended as a protective HARD TOP — IF EQUIPPED
cover for shipping only.
NOTE: A visual instruction sheet is enclosed in the dual
top wrap.
12. Put up the soft top. Refer to “Soft Top — Putting Up
The Soft Top” in this section.

CAUTION!

• The hard top is not designed to carry any additional loads such as roof racks, spare tires, building, hunting, or camping supplies, and/or luggage,
etc. Also, it was not designed as a structural member of the vehicle, and thus cannot properly carry
any additional loads other than environmental
(rain, snow, etc.).
• Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the windshield frame and
body side, or fully removed.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Front Panel(s) Removal

CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew:
• It is recommended that the top be free of water
prior to panel removal. Removing the top, opening
a door or lowering a window while the top is wet
may allow water to drip into the vehicles interior.
• The hard top assembly must be positioned properly to ensure sealing. Improper installation can
cause water to leak into the vehicles interior.
• Careless handling and storage of the removable
roof panels may damage the seals, causing water to
leak into the vehicles interior.
• The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicles interior.

NOTE: Left panel must be removed before removing
right panel.
1. Fold down the sun visor, and move it to the side.
2. Turn the rear fasteners (knobs) (located on the overhead speaker bar assembly) counterclockwise until
they can be removed.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205

3. Turn the center L-shaped locks (two) from the center 4. Turn the rear L-shaped lock (located above the shoulof the roof panel.
der belt anchorage).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

5. Unlatch the header panel latch located at the top of the 6. Remove the left-hand panel.
windshield.
To remove the right panel, follow the steps above
except for Step 3.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207

Freedom Top™ Storage Bag
Vehicles equipped with a Freedom Top™ Modular Hard
Top, come with a Freedom Top™ storage bag that allows
you to store your Freedom Top™ panels. The storage bag
contains two compartments and fits behind the rear seat.
Lay the Freedom bag down so the loops and hooks are
facing downward. Unzip the bag and fold back the outer
flap. Release the Velcro® on the black panel divider and
fold it back.
NOTE: Ensure the front Freedom Top™ panel latch is
closed prior to inserting the panel into the Freedom bag.

Unfold the black panel divider (ensure the divider is
Insert the right side Freedom panel into the bag with the laying flat). Secure the Velcro®, located at the center of
latches facing downward.
the divider.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Insert the left-side Freedom panel into the bag with the Unfold the outer flap and zip the Freedom bag closed.
latches facing upward.
NOTE: Ensure the front Freedom panel latch is closed
prior to inserting the panel into the bag.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209

Install the seat attachment strap (at the top of the bag) Lift the Freedom bag into the vehicle with the hooks and
through the loops.
straps facing the back of the rear seat. Attach the clips at
the bottom of the bag to the child restraint anchorages,
located at the base of the rear seat.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Wrap the upper strap around the rear head restraints and
loop the strap through the buckle. Pull on the strap to
tighten the Freedom bag securely against the rear seat.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211

Front Panel(s) Installation
NOTE: Set the panels on the windshield frame so that
there is no overhang. Also, make sure that the panels are
sitting flush with the body.
1. Install the right panel first, then the left panel.

2. Reinstall the panel(s) using the same steps for removal
in reverse order.
Front Panel(s) Installation With Rear Hard Top
Removed
1. Turn the left and right panels over and move the
NOTE: The front panel(s) must be positioned properly
spacer block (located on the rear of the panel) upward to ensure sealing. Set the panels on the windshield frame
90 degrees.
so that there is no overhang. Also, make sure that the
panels are sitting flush with the body.
2. Install the right panel first, then the left panel.
3. Reinstall the panel(s) using the same steps for removal
in reverse order.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Hard Top Removal
1. Remove both front panels. Refer to “Front Panel(s)
Removal” in this section.
2. Open both doors.
3. Remove the two Torx® head screws that secure the
hard top at the B-pillar (near the top of the door) using
a #40 Torx® head driver (Four–Door Only).
4. Remove the six Torx® head screws that secure the
hard top to the vehicle (along the interior bodyside)
using a #40 Torx® head driver.
5. Open the swing gate all the way to ensure clearance of
the rear window glass. Lift the rear window glass.

6. Locate the wire harness on the left rear inside corner of
the vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213

Wire Harness Connector

Red Locking Tab

7. Release the red locking tab by pulling outward to the 8. To remove the wiring harness press the tab and pull
right.
downward to disconnect.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Press Tab To Disconnect

Pinch Grip On Hose

9. To remove the washer hose, pinch the grips on hose 10. Close the swing gate.
connector and pull downward.
11. Remove the hard top from the vehicle. Place the hard
top on a soft surface to prevent damage.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215

NOTE:

CAUTION!
The removal of the Freedom Top™ requires four
adults located on each corner. Failure to follow this
caution could damage the Freedom Top™.
Rear Hard Top Installation

• The Torx® fasteners that attach the hard top to the
body should be torqued to 88 in lb +/- 22 in lb
(10 N·m +/- 2.5 N·m).
• It is not necessary to pinch connection when reinstalling washer hose. Push on until click is heard.

NOTE: If the door frames are installed from soft top DOOR FRAME
usage, they must be removed prior to installation of the
hard top.
1. Inspect the hard top seals for damage and replace if
necessary.
2. Install the hard top using the same steps for removal
in reverse order.
Make sure that the hard top is sitting flush with the body
at the sides and check to ensure that there is a uniform
gap between the lift glass and hard top.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew:
• Opening a door or lowering a window while the
top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s
interior.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Door Frame Removal

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Careless handling and storage of the removable
door frame(s) may damage the seals, causing water
to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
• The door frame(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.

1. Unscrew and remove the door frame attachment
knobs (two per door).

WARNING!
• Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
door frame(s) removed as you will lose the protection that they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use during off-road operation only.
• Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
doors removed as you will lose the protection that
they can provide. This procedure is furnished for
use during off-road operation only.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217

WARNING!
Use both hands to remove the door frames. The door
frames will fold and could cause injury if both hands
are not used.

2. Place one hand on the upper rear and one hand on the
front of the door frame.
3. Pull the frame toward you with your rearward hand to
remove the frame from the vehicle.
4. Screw the knobs back into the door frame and fold for
storage. Store in a secure location.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219

Door Frame Installation — Two-Door Models — If
Equipped
1. Unfold door frame and unscrew thumbscrews.
2. Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of the body
side, behind the door opening.

3. After the door frame pin has been set into the body
side hole, carefully set the front of the door frame into
the rubber seal at the top of the windshield.
4. Starting with the front of the door frame, clip it over
the metal side bar and then clip the rear, making sure
that the material for the side bar covers is not pinched
by the door frame.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

5. Starting with the front knob, screw in and tighten both Door Frame Installation — Four-Door Models — If
knobs. Repeat on the other side.
Equipped
1. Install the rear door frame first.
2. Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of the body
side, just behind the rear door opening.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221

3. Position the top of the door frame against the metal 4. Loosely install the rear knob (long knob) to hold the
sport bar and press onto the side bar making sure not
door rail in position.
to pinch the material of the sports bar covers and to
5. Carefully set the front of the front door frame in the
ensure it is properly positioned on the seal above the
rubber seal at the top of the windshield.
front of the rear door.

6. Clip the front of the door rail over the side bar making
sure that the material for the side bar cover is not
pinched by the door frame.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

7. Position the rear of the front door frame to lay on top 8. Loosely install both knobs beginning with the front
of the front of the rear door frame. Ensure the seals are
knob (long knob). Then, install the middle knob (short
installed correctly to avoid water leaks.
knob) through the front and rear door frames and
screw into the top of the B-pillar.
9. Tighten the front knob, then the rear most knob, and
then the middle knob. Repeat this procedure for the
other side.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223

Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily on the top
Please visit the owners manual on your DVD for fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and
the top can then be installed. If the temperature is 41°F
instructional videos.
(5°C) or below, do not attempt to put the top down or
roll the rear or side curtains.
SOFT TOP — TWO-DOOR MODELS

CAUTION!

The soft top is not designed to carry any additional
loads such as roof racks, spare tires, building, hunting, or camping supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it
was not designed as a structural member of the
vehicle and, thus, cannot properly carry any additional loads other than environmental (rain, snow,
etc.).
If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or the top
has been folded down for a period of time, the top will
appear to have shrunk when you raise it, making it
difficult to put up. This is caused by a natural contraction
of the vinyl coating on the fabric top.

CAUTION!
• Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car
wash. Window scratches and wax build up may
result.
• Do not lower the top when the temperature is
below 41°F (5°C). Damage to the top may result.
• Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the windshield frame, or
fully lowered.
• Do not lower the top with the windows installed.
Window and top damage may occur.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! (Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Refer to “Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. It contains important information on cleaning
and caring for your vehicle’s fabric top.
• Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to pry or
force any of the clamps, clips, or retainers securing
the soft top. Do not force or pry the soft top
framework when opening or closing. Damage to
the top may result.

• The fabric upper doors and fabric top are designed
only for protection against the elements. Do not
rely on them to contain occupants within the vehicle or to protect against injury during an accident. Remember, always wear seat belts.

WARNING!
• Do not drive the vehicle with the rear window
curtain up unless the side curtains are also removed. Dangerous exhaust gases could enter the
vehicle causing harm to the driver and passengers.

CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• It is recommended that the top be free of water
prior to opening it. Operating the top, opening a
door or lowering a window while the top is wet
may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225

Quick Steps To Lowering The Soft Top

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Careless handling and storage of the soft top may
damage the seals, causing water to leak into the
vehicle’s interior.
• The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure
sealing. Improper installation can cause water to
leak into the vehicle’s interior.

Refer to “Lowering The Soft Top” in this section for
further information.
1. Remove the side windows.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. Remove the back window.

3. Release header latches from the windshield frame.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227

4. Release the sail panel retainers from the body side 5. Make sure the plastic sleeves are slid rearward over
channel at the rear corners of the vehicle.
the Sunrider® link to lock in the link (Sunrider®
Models only).

NOTE: When releasing the sail panel retainers, it is
helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

6. As you begin to lower the top, fold the sail panels so
that they rest on top of the soft top.

7. Release the Sunrider® latch (both sides).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229

8. Open the swing gate and lower the top.

Quick Steps To Raising The Soft Top

NOTE: Ensure fabric does not overhang the sides of the Refer to “Raising The Soft Top” in this section for further
information.
vehicle.
1. Open the swing gate and raise the top, engaging the
Sunrider® latches (another person may be needed to
help with this operation).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. Engage header latches.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231

3. Install rear corner panels.

4. Install the back window.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

5. Install the side windows.

7. Insert the front retainer of the window into the door
channel, making sure the retainer is fully seated and
6. To install the side windows, affix the window tempoproperly positioned on the door frame. Failure to do
rarily by attaching to the Velcro® in the rear corner.
so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the
Start the zipper but close only about 1 in (2.5 cm).
window.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233

8. Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the
window into the bottom side channel, beginning at the
front and working to the rear of the vehicle. Finish by
closing the zipper completely and attaching the Velcro® along the top and rear of the window. Repeat this
step for the opposite side.

1 — Incorrect Insertion
2 — Correct Insertion

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Lowering The Soft Top

1
2
3
4
5

—
—
—
—
—

Header Bow
2–Bow
3–Bow
Sail Panel
Body Side Retainer

6
7
8
9

—
—
—
—

Quarter Window
Check Strap
Front Retainer — Quarter Window
Bottom Retainer — Quarter Window

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235

1
2
3
4
5

—
—
—
—
—

Zipper Start
Zipper Finish
Swing Gate Bar
Swing Gate Brackets
Sail Panels

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Clean side and rear windows before removal to 3. Release the header latches and leave the hooks in the
assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft
loops on the windshield.
top. If zippers are difficult to operate due to road dust,
etc., clean them with a mild soap solution and a small
brush. Cleaning products are available through your
authorized dealer.
1. If your vehicle has half doors, remove each half-door
window by opening the door and lifting the half-door
window out.
NOTE: Stow the half-door windows carefully outside of
the vehicle, never inside, to avoid scratches.
2. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237

4. Open the swing gate.
5. Before unzipping the rear window, release the first 3 in
(7.6 cm) of both sail panels from the channel. Remove
the swing gate bar by pulling it straight rearward out
of the swing gate brackets.

top and down to the left lower corner. Zipper pulls
will stay on the rear window. Pull down on the rear
window to disengage it from the zipper on the top
cover.

• Unzip the rear window starting at the right lower
corner of the window. Pull the zipper up, across the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

6. Remove the rear window retainer from the swing gate 9. Beginning from the rear lower corner, completely
bracket on both the left and right sides.
unzip the window.

7. Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratching.

10. Once unzipped, remove the side window retainers
from the door channel and body side channel. Repeat
8. Undo the Velcro® that runs along the top and rear
this step on the opposite side.
edge of the side window.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239

11. Finish releasing the sail panel retainers from the body 12. As you begin to lower the top, fold the sail panels so
side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle.
that they rest on top of the soft top.

NOTE: When releasing the sail panel retainers, it is
helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

13. The swing gate brackets do not need to be removed 14. Completely release the latches from the loops on the
unless the hard top is being installed. To remove the
windshield frame. If your vehicle is not equipped
swing gate brackets, pull the front of the bracket
with the Sunrider® package, proceed to Step 15.
forward while rolling the entire bracket back in
toward the vehicle to disengage.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241

15. Make sure the plastic sleeves are slid rearward over 16. Unlatch the side bows from both door rails (Sunthe Sunrider® link to lock in the link (Sunrider®
rider® Models only).
Models only).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

17. Before lowering the top, open the swing gate to
prevent possible damage to the rear center highmounted brake light. Move to the front of the vehicle.
Grasp the side bow behind the header and lift the
top, folding it toward the rear of the vehicle.
NOTE: Help from another person will ease this operation.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243

18. Tuck the fabric and the check straps between the Raising The Soft Top
bows and as far inward as possible. This will keep
1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
any portion of the top from flapping outside of the
2. Install door frames, if removed. Refer to “Door Frame”
vehicle.
in this section for further information.
3. Make sure the plastic sleeve is slid over Sunrider® link
(Sunrider® Models only).

19. Close the front header latches.
20. Remove the door frames, if desired. Refer to “Door
Frame” in this section for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

4. Standing on the side of the vehicle, lift the top by the 5. Make sure the Sunrider® bracket on the side bows
side bow and the 2–bow (middle bow) up and over the
latches to the door rails (Sunrider® Models only).
sports bar until the header rests on the top of the
windshield frame.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245

6. Open the header latches and engage the hook on each 7. If the swing gate brackets were removed, install them
side onto the windshield loops (do not close the
by hooking the rear edge of the bracket on the interior
latches).
side of the body channel. Then, rotate it rearward and
over the channel until it snaps onto the exterior part of
the rail. To be properly located, the bracket must only
be clipped to the shortened rail edge.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

8. Move to the rear of the vehicle and gently pull the sail 9. Partially install the sail panel retainers into the body
panels over the rear roof bow.
side channel, leaving the last 3 in (7.6 cm) toward the
rear window loose (on both sides). Pulling down on
the rear roof bow (3–bow) will aid to reach the channel
with the retainers.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247

10. To install the side windows, affix the window tempo- 11. Insert the front retainer of the window into the door
rarily by attaching to the Velcro® in the rear corner.
channel, making sure the retainer is fully seated and
Start the zipper but close only about 1 in (2.5 cm).
properly positioned on the door frame. Failure to do
so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to
the window.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

12. Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the
window into the bottom side channel, beginning at
the front and working to the rear of the vehicle.
Finish by closing the zipper completely and attaching
the Velcro® along the top and rear of the window.
Repeat this step for the opposite side.

1 — Incorrect Insertion
2 — Correct Insertion

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249

13. Locate the black swing gate bar. Slide the swing gate
bar over the receiver at the bottom inside of the rear
window. The spongy part of the seal should be down
and pointed outward to seal with the swing gate
when closed.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

14. Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends
at the lower left corner of the rear window opening.
Ensure that the zippers are properly started and
aligned before zipping to prevent damage.

15. Run the zipper fully around to the right side of the
window.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251

16. Grasp the swing gate bar and position it into the 17. Insert the rear window retainer into the swing gate
swing gate brackets.
bracket on both the left and right sides.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

18. Apply downward pressure on the top corner of the SUNRIDER® (TWO-DOOR MODELS)
rear soft top bow (3–bow), then complete attaching
the sail panel retainers into the body side channel.
CAUTION!
19. Close the header latches and return the sun visors to
their secured position.

Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a
window while the top is wet may allow water to drip
into the vehicle’s interior.
NOTE: If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph
(64 km/h) with the Sunrider® feature open, it is recommended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253

3. Make sure to slide the plastic sleeves forward to
unlock the Sunrider® links.

Opening The Sunrider®
1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
2. Release the header latches from the loops on the
windshield frame.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

4. Grasp the header and lift the top back. Make sure the 5. Locate the straps to secure the side bows. Wrap the
material is folded back as shown.
straps around the bows as shown. Repeat on the other
side.
NOTE: The Sunrider® latch on the door rail should not
be activated for Sunrider® use. If activated, the soft top
must be reinstalled starting from the sail panels.

6. Reposition the sun visors.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255

Closing The Sunrider®

SOFT TOP — FOUR-DOOR MODELS

1. Remove the straps from the side bows.

Please visit the owners manual on your DVD for
instructional videos.

2. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
3. Grasp the front header and pull it to the front of the
vehicle.
4. Hook the header latches to the loops on the windshield frame, close latches, and return the sun visors to
their original positions.
5. Slide the plastic sleeve rearward over the Sunrider®
link.

CAUTION!
The soft top is not designed to carry any additional
loads such as roof racks, spare tires, building, hunting, or camping supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it
was not designed as a structural member of the
vehicle, and thus cannot properly carry any additional loads other than environmental (rain, snow,
etc.).
If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or the top
has been folded down for a period of time, the top will
appear to have shrunk when you raise it, making it
difficult to put up. This is caused by a natural contraction
of the vinyl coating on the fabric top.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily on the top
fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and
the top can then be snapped into place. If the temperature is 41°F (5°C) or below, do not attempt to put the top
down or roll the rear or side curtains.

CAUTION!
• Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car
wash. Window scratches and wax buildup may
result.
• Do not lower the top when the temperature is
below 41°F (5°C). Damage to the top may result.
• Do not lower the top when the windows are dirty.
Grit may scratch the window.
• Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the windshield frame, or
fully lowered.

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not lower the top with the windows installed.
Window and top damage may occur.
• Refer to “Appearance Care for Fabric Top Models”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. It contains important information on cleaning
and caring for your vehicle’s fabric top.
• Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to pry or
force any of the clamps, clips, or retainers securing
the soft top. Do not force or pry the soft top
framework when opening or closing. Damage to
the top may result.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257

WARNING!

CAUTION!

• Do not drive the vehicle with the rear window
curtain up unless the side curtains are also open.
Dangerous exhaust gases which can kill could
enter the vehicle.
• The fabric upper doors and fabric top are designed
only for protection against the elements. Do not
rely on them to contain occupants within the vehicle or to protect against injury during an accident. Remember, always wear seat belts.

Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• It is recommended that the top be free of water
prior to opening it. Operating the top, opening a
door or lowering a window while the top is wet
may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
• Careless handling and storage of the soft top may
damage the seals, causing water to leak into the
vehicle’s interior.
• The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure
sealing. Improper installation can cause water to
leak into the vehicle’s interior.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Do not remove any of the three attachment Quick Steps For Lowering The Soft Top
knobs unless you are planning on installing the hard top.
1. Remove the side windows.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259

2. Remove the back window.

3. Release header latches from the windshield frame.

NOTE: Start zipper from the right side to remove back
window.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

4. Release the sail panel retainers from the body side 5. Fold the sail panels so that they rest on top of the soft
channel at the rear corners of the vehicle.
top.

NOTE: When releasing the sail panel retainers, it is
helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261

6. Fold header rearward, pulling the fabric to the rear.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

7. Release Sunrider® latch (both sides).

8. Open the swing gate and lower the top.

NOTE: Ensure the fabric does not overhang the sides of
the vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263

Quick Steps For Raising The Soft Top
1. Open the swing gate and raise the top, engaging the
Sunrider® latches (another person may be needed to
help with this operation).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. Install rear corner panels.

3. Rotate the header forward.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265

4. Engage the header latches.

5. Install the back window.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

6. Install the side windows.

7. To install the side windows, affix the window temporarily by attaching to the Velcro® in the rear corner.
Start the zipper but close only about 1 in (2.5 cm).

8. Insert the front retainer of the window into the door
channel, making sure the retainer is fully seated and

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267

properly positioned on the door frame. Failure to do so 9. Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the
can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the
window into the bottom side channel, beginning at the
window.
front and working to the rear of the vehicle. Finish by
closing the zipper completely and attaching the Velcro® along the top and rear of the window. Repeat this
step for the opposite side.

1 — Incorrect Insertion
2 — Correct Insertion

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Folding Down The Soft Top

1
2
3
4
5

—
—
—
—
—

Header Bow
2–Bow
3–Bow
4–Bow
Sail Panel

6 — Body Side Retainer
7 — Quarter Window
8 — Check Strap
9 — Front Retainer — Quarter Window
10 — Bottom Retainer — Quarter Window
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269

1
2
3
4
5

—
—
—
—
—

Zipper Start
Zipper Finish
Swing Gate Bar
Swing Gate Brackets
Sail Panels

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Clean side and rear windows before removal to 3. Release the header latches and hooks from the loops
assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft
on the windshield frame.
top. If zippers are difficult to operate due to road dust,
etc., clean them with a mild soap solution and a small
brush. Cleaning products are available through your
authorized dealer.
1. If your vehicle has half-doors, remove each half-door
window by opening the door and lifting the half-door
window out.
NOTE: Stow half-door windows carefully outside of the
vehicle, never inside, to avoid scratches.
2. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271

top and down to the left lower corner. Zipper pulls
will stay on the rear window. Pull down on the rear
window to disengage it from the zipper on the top
cover.

• Unzip the rear window starting at the right lower
corner of the window. Pull the zipper up, across the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

6. Remove the rear window retainer from the swing gate 9. Beginning from the rear lower corner, completely
bracket on both the left and right sides.
unzip the window.

7. Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratching.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273

11. Finish releasing the sail panel retainers from the body 12. Fold the sail panels so that they rest on top of the soft
side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle.
top.

NOTE: When releasing the sail panel retainers, it is
helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

13. The swing gate brackets do not need to be removed 14. Grasp the front side bow behind the header, and lift
unless the hard top is being installed. To remove the
the top.
swing gate brackets, pull the front of the bracket
forward while rolling the entire bracket back in
toward the vehicle to disengage.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275

15. Fold back the front section of the top, pulling the 16. Fold the top so that the material forms a #W# as
fabric rearward. Gently rest the header on top of the
shown. Enter the vehicle and move the material into
rear portion of the deck.
two folds.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

17. Release the side bows by pressing down on the latch 18. Before lowering the top, open the swing gate to
above the front of the rear door. Push the top
prevent possible damage to the rear center highrearward to disengage. Repeat this step on the other
mounted brake light. Grasp the folded side bows and
side.
slide the top along the door frame track to the rear
door frame.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277

19. Gently slide the side bows off the door frame track 20. Tuck the fabric and the check straps between the
and lower the top down into the vehicle.
bows as far inside as possible. This will keep any
portion of the top from flapping outside of the
NOTE: Help from another person will ease this operavehicle.
tion.
21. Once the top is fully down, use the Velcro® straps
provided to secure the top to the vehicle by wrapping
the strap around the side bows and through the slot
on the body.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Putting Up The Soft Top
NOTE: Be extremely careful when putting up the soft
top to prevent the doors from getting scratched. It may be
helpful to open the rear doors.
1. Install the door frames, if removed. Refer to “Door
Frame” in this section for further information.
2. Undo the straps used to secure the top in the down
position and store in secure location.
3. Open the swing gate.
22. Close the front header latches.
23. Remove the door frames, if desired. Refer to “Door
Frame” in this section for further information.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279

4. Grasp the folded side bows and lift to the top of the 5. Insert the slider feature of the knuckles into the door
rear door frames.
frame tracks and slide the top forward.
NOTE: Help from another person will ease this operation.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

6. Ensure that the top locks into the Sunrider® locking 7. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
mechanisms that are located above the front of the rear
8. Standing on the side of the vehicle, lift the top by the
doors.
side bow until it rests on the windshield frame.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281

9. Open the header latches and engage the hook on each 10. If the swing gate brackets were removed, install them
side onto the windshield loops (do not close the
by hooking the rear edge of the bracket on the
latches).
interior side of the body channel. Then, rotate it
rearward and over the channel until it snaps onto the
exterior part of the rail. To be properly located, the
bracket must only be clipped to the shortened rail
edge.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

11. Ensure that the straps are positioned correctly before Partially install the sail panel retainers into the body side
pulling the sail panels over the rear roof bow (4– channel, leaving the last 3 in (7.6 cm) toward the rear
bow).
window loose (on both sides). Pulling down on the rear
roof bow (4–bow) will aid in reaching the channel with
the retainers.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283

12. To install the side windows, affix the window tem- 13. Insert the front retainer of the window into the door
porarily by attaching it to the Velcro® in the upper
channel, making sure the retainer is fully seated and
rear corner. Start the zipper but close only about 1 in
properly positioned on the door frame. Failure to do
(2.5 cm).
so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to
the window.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

14. Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the
window into the bottom side channel, beginning at
the front and working to the rear of the vehicle.
Finish by closing the zipper completely and attaching
the Velcro® along the top and rear of the window.
Repeat this step for the opposite side.

1 — Incorrect Insertion
2 — Correct Insertion

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285

15. Locate the black swing gate bar. Slide the swing gate
bar over the receiver at the bottom inside of the rear
window. The spongy part of the seal should be down
and pointed outward to seal with the swing gate
when closed.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

16. Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends 18. Grasp the swing gate bar and position it into the
at the lower left corner of the rear window opening.
swing gate brackets.
Ensure that the zippers are properly started and
aligned before zipping to prevent damage.

17. Run the first zipper fully around to the right side of
the window.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287

19. Insert the rear window retainer into the swing gate 21. Close the header latches and return the sun visors to
bracket on both the left and right sides.
their secured position.

20. Complete the installation of the sail panel by inserting the rest of the retainer into the body channel.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

SUNRIDER® (FOUR-DOOR MODELS)

Opening The Sunrider®
1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.

CAUTION!
Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a
window while the top is wet may allow water to drip
into the vehicle’s interior.

2. Release the header latches from the loops on the
windshield frame.

NOTE: If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph
(64 km/h) with the Sunrider® feature open, it is recommended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289

3. Grasp the front side bow behind the header, and lift 4. Fold back the front section of the top and gently rest
the top.
the header on top of the rear portion of the deck.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

5. Fold the top so that the material forms a #W# as shown. 6. Secure the top by using the two provided straps. Each
Enter the vehicle and move the material into two folds.
strap will wrap around the side bow and Velcro® to
itself; use one strap on each side of the vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291

remove the side bars and fold down the windshield,
drive slowly and cautiously. It is recommended that the
Perform the above steps in the opposite order.
speed of the vehicle be limited to 10 mph (16 km/h), with
NOTE: Failure to fold the fabric rearward will allow the low range operation preferred if you are driving off-road
material to sag and may block the rearview mirror.
with the windshield folded down.
Closing The Sunrider®

FOLDING WINDSHIELD
The fold-down windshield and removable side bars on
your vehicle are structural elements that can provide
some protection in some accidents. The windshield also
provides some protection against weather, road debris
and intrusion of small branches and other objects.

Raise the windshield and reinstall the side bars as soon as
the task that required their removal is completed and
before you return to on-road driving. Both you and your
passenger should wear seat belts at all times, on-road and
off-road, regardless of whether the windshield is raised
or folded down.

Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the doors. If
Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the windshield you choose to remove the doors, see your authorized
down and the side bars removed as you lose the protecdealer for a replacement cowl-mounted outside mirror.
tion these structural elements can provide.
Federal law requires outside mirrors on vehicles for
If required for certain off-road uses, the side bars can be on-road use.
removed and the windshield folded down. However, the
protection afforded by these features is then lost. If you
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

Carefully follow these warnings to help protect
against personal injury:
• Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the windshield down.
• Do not drive your vehicle unless the windshield is
securely fastened, either up or down.
• Eye protection, such as goggles, should be worn at
all times when the windshield is down.
• Be sure that you carefully follow the instructions
for raising the windshield. Make sure that the
folding windshield, windshield wipers, side bars,
and all associated hardware and fasteners are correctly and tightly assembled before driving your
vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may
prevent your vehicle from providing you and your
passengers protection in some accidents.

• If you remove the doors, store them outside the
vehicle. In the event of an accident, a loose door
may cause personal injury.
Lowering The Windshield And Removing Side
Bars
1. Lower the fabric top or remove the hard top following
the instructions in this manual.
NOTE: To assist in properly reinstalling side bars, mark
the original locations prior to removing.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293

2. Remove the two top hex bolts (13 mm), and the one 3. Remove the sun visor.
side hex bolt (13 mm) visible through the trim (Do not
4. Remove the A-pillar cap.
remove plastic corner trim, sun visor bolts, or sport
bar covering).
5. Disconnect microphone (if equipped with Uconnect®
phone).
6. Open the sport bar Velcro covering.
7. Remove the one hex bolt (13 mm) visible through the
plastic trim on the bottom side of the side bar, one hex
bolt (13 mm) on the side of the side bar, and one hex
bolt (13 mm) on top of the side bar.
NOTE: Pull side bar out horizontally when removing.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

8. Remove the side bar assembly, and reattach the sport
bar Velcro® covering.
9. To safely store the side bars in your vehicle, use four
cinch straps (available from your authorized dealer).
Attach the straps through the slots located on the floor
behind the folded rear seat at the front of the storage
bin cover.

WARNING!

CAUTION!
Do not remove the head impact foam from the side
bars, as damage to the foam may result.

You or others could be injured if you carry the side
bars loose in your vehicle. Remove the side bars from
the vehicle or securely store them as described or
they may cause personal injury if an accident occurs.
See your authorized dealer for the cinch straps.

NOTE: Store all of the mounting bolts in their original
threaded holes and tighten for safekeeping.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295

10. Remove the windshield wiper arms by first pulling
the wiper away from the windshield and out to the
“lock” position. Unsnap the wiper arm nut caps, and
remove the retaining nuts. Lift the wiper arms off and
store them in the center console or securely behind
the rear seat.

NOTE: It may be necessary to use a battery terminal
puller tool in order to separate the wiper arms from the
shaft after the nuts have been removed.
11. Remove the lower windshield plates by removing the
six black round-headed Torx® head screws (using a
#40 Torx® head driver) on each side of the base of the 12. Lower the windshield gently until it contacts the
rubber hood bumpers.
windshield.
13. Secure the windshield by passing a cinch strap
through the footman hoop on the center of the hood
and on the center of the windshield frame. Tighten
the strap to secure the windshield in place.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

3. Attach the front of the side bar to the windshield
frame.
1. Raise the windshield.
• Install the top two hex bolts (13 mm) first, then the
2. Loosely attach the rear of the side bar to the sport bar.
lower side hex bolt (13 mm). The lower side bolt will
Refer to Step 4 of “Lowering Windshield And Removnot align until the top two bolts are installed.
ing Side Bars” earlier in this section.
Raising The Windshield And Replacing Side Bars

• Reattach the sport bar Velcro® covering.

4. Tighten all side bar attachment bolts.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297

5. Install the lower windshield plates with the six black REAR WINDOW FEATURES — HARD TOP ONLY
round-headed Torx® head screws (using a #40 Torx®
Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped
head driver) on each side of the base of the windA rotary switch on the center portion of the control lever
shield.
(located on the right side of the steering column) controls
the operation of the rear wiper/washer function.

6. Reinstall the wiper arms.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Rotate the switch upward to the first detent Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped
position for rear wiper operation.
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate controls mode control knob. Push the
button to turn on the rear window defroster. An indicator
in the button will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, push the button a
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
second time.
to the LOCK position, the wiper will automatically return
to the “Park” position. When the vehicle is restarted, the NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
wiper will resume function at whichever position the window defroster only when the engine is operating.
switch is set at.
Rotate the switch upward past the first detent
to activate the rear washer. The washer pump
and the wiper will continue to operate as long
as the switch is held. Upon release, the wiper
will cycle two to three times before returning to the set
position.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 299

CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
! INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .304
! INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
! INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .306
! COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
▫ Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
▫ Compass/Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . . .324
▫ Trip Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
! ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327

▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
▫ Oil Change Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
▫ EVIC Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
▫ Compass, Outside Temperature Display / ECO
(Fuel Saver Mode) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .333
▫ Average Fuel Economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
▫ Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
▫ EVIC Units Selection (UNITS IN Display) . . . .337

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

▫ Advanced EVIC Messages (Customer Information
Features). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337

▫ INFO Button — DISC Mode For MP3/WMA
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355

▫ System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337

▫ Uconnect® (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped . . .358

▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338

! Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV
— IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362

! Uconnect® 230 – AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND
6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX
JACK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342

▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command System)
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362

▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .342

▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362

▫ Operation Instructions — DISC Mode For CD And ! Uconnect® 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD – Video . . . . . . .350
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .363
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files. . . . . . . . .352
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
▫ LIST Button — DISC Mode For MP3/WMA
MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
▫ Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode . . . .371
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303

! Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO . . . . .372

▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390

▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . .372

▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392

▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378

▫ Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . .394

▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
▫ LIST Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play. . . . . .383
▫ INFO Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play . . . . .384

! STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . .396
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397

! CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . .
▫ Uconnect® (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped . . .384 ! RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES .
! iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . .389
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . .
▫ Connecting The iPod® Or External USB
! CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning . . . .
▫ Using This Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
▫ Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

. .397
. .398
. .398
. .400
. .400
. .404
. .412

304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1
2
3
4
5
6

— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Radio
— Assist Handle
— Glove Compartment
— Power Window Switches

7 — Climate Controls
8 — Power Outlet
9 — Lower Switch Bank
10 — Power Mirror Switch — If Equipped
11 — Horn

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

3. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Fuel Gauge

This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.

The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
4. Low Fuel Warning Light
2. Charging System Light

When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.8 gal
(10.6 L) this light will turn on and a single chime
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the will sound.
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, and remain 5. Speedometer
on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes
on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s nones- Indicates vehicle speed.
sential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at 6. Front Axle Lock Indicator — If Equipped
idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means
Indicates when the front axle lock has been
that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the
activated.
charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See
an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307

7. Seat Belt Reminder Light

9. Oil Pressure Warning Light

When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.
After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will flash or remain on continuously. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.

This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine is
started; if the bulb does not come on, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer. If the light turns on
while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as
soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.

8. Turn Signal Indicators

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

The left or right arrow will flash with the corre- 10. Brake Warning Light
sponding exterior turn signal lights when the turn
This light monitors various brake functions,
signal lever is operated. A chime will sound if the vehicle is
including brake fluid level and parking brake
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
the
brake
fluid
level is low, or that there is a problem with
for a defective outside light bulb.
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac- dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
dropped below a specified level.
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.

or park lights are left on, the high beam indicator light
will remain illuminated and a chime will sound.
12. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light

After the ignition is turned on, the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) light illuminates to indicate
function check at vehicle startup. If the light remains on
after startup or comes on and stays on at road speeds, it
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
may indicate that the ABS has detected a malfunction or
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posihas become inoperative. The system reverts to standard
tion.
non-anti-lock brakes.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. Light are on, see an authorized dealer immediately. Refer
11. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever
away from you to switch the headlights to high beam.
Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to
low beam. If the driver’s door is open, and the headlights

to “Anti-Lock
Operating”.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Brake

System”

“Starting And

310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

13. Air Bag Warning Light

CAUTION!

This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first Do not operate the engine with the tachometer
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on pointer in the red area. Engine damage will occur.
during starting, stays on, or turns on while 16. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
monitors engine and automatic transmission confurther information.
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the ignition
14. Rear Axle Lock Indicator — If Equipped
is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb does
This light indicates when the rear axle lock has not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/
RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
been activated.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after
15. Tachometer
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute stays on through several typical driving styles. In most
(RPM x 1000).
situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311

When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.

CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.

WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal

WARNING! (Continued)
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
17. Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the light turns on while driving, safely pull
over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it
off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle
the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: As the coolant temperature gauge approaches 20. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
#H,# this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxisound. Further overheating will cause the temperature
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
gauge to pass #H.# In this case, a continuous chime will
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
sound, until the engine is allowed to cool or the 4 minutes
until the vehicle is disarmed.
duration is expired, whichever come first.
21. Temperature Gauge
18. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperaThis indicator will illuminate when the front fog
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
lights are on.
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
19. 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperaThis light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
the four-wheel drive mode, and the front and or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked to- exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
gether forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313

CAUTION!

WARNING! (Continued)

Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.

Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.

WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your

22. Odometer / Trip Odometer / ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) Button
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of the two trip odometer settings or the “ECO”
display. Trip A or Trip B will appear when in the trip
odometer mode. Press and hold the button for two
seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilometers. The odometer must be in trip mode to reset.
23. Shift Lever Indicator
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
This indicator will illuminate when a manual correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
shift is needed either up or down.
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
25. Odometer / Trip Odometer Display Area
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
The odometer display shows the total distance the ve- that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
hicle has been driven. The trip odometer shows indi- must be reset at zero.
vidual trip mileage. Refer to “Odometer / Trip Odometer
/ ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) Button” for additional
information.
24. Gear Shift Indicator

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315

NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with the optional
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the inWhen the appropriate conditions exist, the following
strument cluster, all the messages will only be displayed
odometer messages will display:
in the EVIC display. For additional information, refer to
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Saver Indicator “Electronic Vehicle Information Center — If Equipped”.
ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajar
The ECO indicator will illuminate when you are driving
gATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Swing Gate Ajar in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
Vehicle Odometer Messages

LoW tirE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure LoW tirE
When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer disHOTOIL . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Oil Temperature
Above Normal Limits play will toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles.
“HOTOIL” Transmission Temperature Warning Message
gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault
The “HOTOIL” cluster message will appear in the odomnoFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Fault eter accompanied with a chime to indicate that there is
excessive transmission fluid temperature that might ocCHAngE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required cur with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may also
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

occur when operating the vehicle in a high torque
converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel drive operation
(e.g., snow plowing, off-road operation). If this “HOTOIL” message turns on, stop the vehicle and run the
engine at idle or faster with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the message turns off.

CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature “HOTOIL” Warning message illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission damage or
transmission failure.

WARNING!
If the Transmission Temperature “HOTOIL” Warning message is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle, in some circumstances you could
cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot
engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
gASCAP
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display
area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317

noFUSE
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odometer display area. For further information on fuses and
fuse locations refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”.
CHAngE OIL Message
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “CHANgE OIL” message will
display in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to
indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The
engine oil change indicator system is duty-cycle based,
which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style.

Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument
cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do
not start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
This indicator shows when the Hill Descent
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
Control (HDC) feature is turned on. The lamp
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
will be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can
tires.)
only be armed when the transfer case is in the
“4WD LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less then As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are not met while equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
attempting to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
light will flash on/off.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi27. Cruise Indicator
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
This indicator shows when the electronic speed possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
control system is turned on.
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
28. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
should be checked monthly when cold and Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
26. Hill Decent Indicator

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319

maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS to continue to function properly.
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the

CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

29. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/ NOTE:
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
to ON/RUN.
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction InESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
previously.
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
30. Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front
sway bar is disconnected.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321

31. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on
the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when
the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the shift
lever is placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running,
your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

32. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
33. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display / Compass Mini-Trip Computer Display — If
Equipped

When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, messages. For further information, refer to “Electronic
immediate service is required and you may experience Vehicle Information Center”.
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will shows the Mini-Trip Computer messages. Refer to “Minicome on when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN Trip Computer” for further information.
and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not
come on during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER — IF
EQUIPPED
The Compass/Trip Computer features a driverinteractive display (displays information on outside temperature, compass direction, and trip information). It is
located on the lower left part of the cluster below the
speedometer.

Compass Display

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323

NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
The Compass/Temperature control buttons are located
be driven several minutes before the updated temperaon the left spoke of the steering wheel.
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
Control Buttons

The following displays can be reset or changed:
• Compass/Temperature

• AVG ECO (changes to present fuel economy)
• ET (will reset display)

• DTE (distance to empty)

These messages can be cycled through by pushing the
STEP button on the steering wheel. To reset the AVG ECO
Mini-Trip Control Buttons
or ET, push and hold the STEP button for approximately
Push and release the STEP button on the steering wheel three seconds.
to access the options in the Compass display.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Compass/Temperature Display
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with a Chrysler
Uconnect® gps (Navigation Radio), the NAV system will
provide the compass direction, and the variance and
calibration menus will be unavailable. The compass will
perform accurately, based on GPS signals instead of the
Earth’s magnetic field.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences and provide the most accurate compass heading.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Compass Variance Map

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325

2. Press and hold the RESET button (for approximately
10 seconds) until the current variance zone number is
Start the engine and leave the transmission gear selector
displayed.
lever in the PARK position. Press and hold the RESET
button on the steering wheel (for approximately ten 3. Release the RESET button, then press and hold again
seconds) until the current variance zone number is disfor approximately 10 seconds, until the direction is
played. To change the zone, press and release the STEP
displayed, with the CAL indicator on continuously in
button to increase the variance one step. Repeat as
the display.
necessary until the desired variance is achieved.
4. To complete the compass calibration, drive the vehicle
NOTE: The factory default zone is 8. During programin one or more complete 360–degree circles, under
ming, the zone value will wrap around from zone 15 to
5 mph (8 km/h) in an area free from power lines and
zone 1.
large metallic objects, until the CAL indicator turns
off. The compass will now function normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic, inaccurate or abnormal, NOTE:
To Set The Variance

you may wish to calibrate the compass. Prior to calibrat- • A good calibration requires a level surface and an
ing the compass, make sure the proper zone is selected.
environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad
1. Start the engine and leave the transmission in the
tracks, etc.
PARK position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top • Elapsed Time
of the center of the instrument panel. This is where the
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
compass sensor is located.
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is
in the RUN or START positions. The elapsed timer
Average Fuel Economy / Distance To Empty (DTE)
displays minutes:seconds. After 59minutes:59seconds, it
/ Elapsed Time
displays hours:minutes:seconds.
• Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the digits will go blank
while the history information is erased. The averaging
will restart when enough new distance and fuel data is
accumulated.

Trip Conditions

Trip Odometer (ODO) / ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator)
— If Equipped

This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset. Push and release the right button (on the instru• Distance To Empty (DTE)
ment cluster) to switch from odometer to Trip A or Trip B
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with or to ECO. Push and hold the right button while the
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is odometer/trip odometer is displayed to reset.
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327

Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since the last
reset.
ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
The ECO indicator will illuminate when you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
Trip Display Button

Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for trip A since the last
reset.

The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Outside Temperature (°F or °C)
• Digital Speedometer
• Vehicle Info

• ECO Display

• Fuel Economy

• Miles/kilometers To Empty
• Timer

• Display Units Selection

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
• System Warnings (Door Ajar, etc.)
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
variety of useful information by pushing the switches
mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the • Tire Pressure Monitor System — If Equipped
following:

• Compass Heading (N, S, E, W, NE, NW, SE, SW)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329

The system allows the driver to select information by • MENU Button
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Push and release the MENU button to advance
wheel:
the display to each of the EVIC Main Menu
features or to return to the Main Menu from a
sub-menu. Upon reaching the last item in the
Main Menu the EVIC will advance to the first item in the
Main Menu with the next MENU button push and
release.
• COMPASS Button

EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons

Push and release the COMPASS button to
return to the Compass/Outside Temperature/
Audio Information/ECO screen whenever the
current display is not the Compass/Outside
Temperature/Audio Information/ECO screen.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• SELECT Button

• Service TPM System (refer to #Tire Pressure Monitoring System# in #Starting and Operating#)

the following messages:

• Key Fob Battery Low (with a single chime)

Push and release the SELECT button when
prompted by the EVIC to Reset Main Menu • Premium TPM System Graphic Display
features with a reset capability or to change
• Damaged Key
Personal Settings.
• Key in Ignition
• DOWN Button
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime)
Push and release the DOWN button when
prompted by the EVIC to step through stored • Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
system warning messages or Personal Settings
• Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
features.
• Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
chime)
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays • Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
• Low Tire Pressure
• Low Fuel

• Personal Settings Not Avail. – Vehicle Not in Park —
automatic transmission
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331

• Personal Settings Not Avail. – Vehicle in Motion — next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
manual transmission
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
• Door Ajar (with vehicle graphic showing which door is
your personal driving style.
open. A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
motion).
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position. To
• Gate Ajar (with vehicle graphic showing the Liftgate/ turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
back door open and A single chime )
MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system
• Check Gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in “Starting (after performing the scheduled maintenance), perform
the following procedure:
And Operating” for more details)
• Oil Change Required (with a single chime)

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Do not
start the engine.

Oil Change Required

2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within 10 seconds.

• ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — if equipped

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will display in the EVIC display for approximately 5
seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
EVIC Main Menu

• Oil Pressure
• Transmission Temp
• Oil Life Remaining (Automatic Oil Change Indicator)

• EVIC Units Selection
To step to each main menu feature push and release the • System Warnings
MENU button once for each step. A step from the last item
in the list will cause the first item in the feature list to be • Personal Settings
displayed. The following features are in the Main menu:
• Tire Pressure
• Compass, Outside Temperature, and ECO display
NOTE: For features in the EVIC that can be reset (Average Fuel Economy and Elapsed Time), the EVIC prompts
• Digital Speedometer
a reset with a SELECT button graphic and the word
• Average Fuel Economy
RESET next to it.
• Distance to Empty
When the SELECT button is pushed, the selected feature
will reset and RESET ALL will display next to the
• Elapsed Time
SELECT button graphic. Pushing SELECT a second time
• Vehicle Information
will reset both Average Fuel Economy and Elapsed Time.
• Coolant Temp
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333

After three seconds without pushing SELECT, RESET ECO (Fuel Saver Mode) — If Equipped
ALL will return to RESET and only the selected feature The ECO message will display below the outside temwill have been reset.
perature in the EVIC display (if the audio system is on
the ECO indicator will override the audio information
Compass, Outside Temperature Display / ECO
display line if the #Display Fuel Saver# personal setting is
(Fuel Saver Mode) — If Equipped
ON — see #Personal Settings# section). This message will
The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is
appear whenever you are driving in a fuel efficient
facing. Push and release the COMPASS button to display
manner.
one of eight compass headings, the outside temperature/
ECO if the EVIC display is not already displaying this This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving
screen.
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to Automatic Compass Calibration
be driven several minutes before the updated tempera- This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

metallic objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in 3. Push the DOWN button until “Calibrate Compass”
displays in the EVIC.
the EVIC turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
4. Push and release the SELECT button to start the
calibration. The “CAL” indicator will display in the
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and
EVIC.
an environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
etc.
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the
“CAL” indicator turns off. The compass will now
Manual Compass Calibration
function normally.
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” indicator
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the Compass Variance
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
1. Start the engine. Leave the shift lever in PARK in order North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
to enter the EVIC Programming Menus.
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
2. Push the MENU button until Personal Settings
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
(Customer-Programmable Features) displays in the
differences and provide the most accurate compass headEVIC.
ing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335

NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from To Change The Compass Variance:
the top of the instrument panel; this is where the compass
1. Turn the ignition switch RUN (it is not necessary to
sensor is located.
start the engine).
2. Push the MENU button until Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features) displays in the
EVIC.
3. Push the DOWN button until “Compass Variance”
message and the last variance zone number displays
in the EVIC.
4. Push and release the SELECT button until the proper
variance zone is selected according to the map.
5. Push and release the COMPASS button to exit.
Compass Variance Map

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Average Fuel Economy

When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a text display of #LOW FUEL”. This display will
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display.

Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
Average Fuel Economy can be reset by pushing and
holding the SELECT button (as prompted in the EVIC
display). Upon reset, the history information will be
erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel
average reading before the reset.
Elapsed Time

Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is in the RUN or START position.
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous Elapsed time is displayed as follows:
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
• Hours
tank level. DTE cannot be reset.
• Minutes
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of • Seconds
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE display value.
Elapsed time can be reset by pushing and holding the
SELECT button (as prompted in the EVIC display). Upon
Distance To Empty (DTE)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337

reset all digits will change to zeros and time will start • Coolant Temperature
incrementing again if the ignition switch is in RUN or
Shows the actual coolant temperature.
START.
• Oil Pressure
EVIC Units Selection (UNITS IN Display)
Shows the actual oil pressure.
Displays the units used for the Outside Temperature,
Average Fuel Economy and Distance to Empty features. • Transmission Temperature
Push and Release the SELECT button to toggle units Shows the actual transmission fluid temperature.
between #U.S.# and #METRIC#.
• Automatic Oil Change Indicator
Advanced EVIC Messages (Customer Information
Shows the oil life measured in percentage.
Features)
Push and release the MENU button until “Advanced
EVIC Messages” displays in the EVIC. Then, push the
DOWN button to display any one of the following
choices.
• Digital Speedometer

Shows the actual vehicle speed in mph or km/h.

System Status
Displays SYSTEM OK if there are no active Warning
Messages stored. Pushing and releasing the DOWN
button when SYSTEM OK is displayed will do nothing.
Displays SYSTEM WARNINGS PRESENT if there are
active Warning Messages stored. Pushing and releasing

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

the DOWN button when SYSTEM WARNINGS PRESENT is displayed will display each stored warning for
each button push. Push and release the MENU button to
return to the Main Menu.

functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the SELECT button while in this display to select English,
Espanol or Francais. Then, as you continue, the information will display in the selected language.

Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)

Auto Lock Doors

When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled, to
make your selection, press and release the SELECT button
until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
Push and release the MENU button until Personal Setshowing the system has been deactivated.
tings displays in the EVIC.
Use the DOWN button to display one of the following Auto Unlk On Exit
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the vehicle speed is at 0 mph (0 km/h)
(manual transmission) or when the shift lever is in PARK
(auto transmission).

choices:

When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or
Language
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
When in this display you may select one of five lan- make your selection, press and release the SELECT
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip button until “On” or “Off” appears.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339

RKE Unlock

Flash Lamp with Lock

When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver
Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
press and release the SELECT button until “Driver Door
1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.

When on is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the Sound Horn with Lock feature selected. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until “On” or “Off” appears.
Headlamp Off Delay

When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
Sound Horn With Lock
and release the SELECT button until “0,” “30,” “60,” or
When on is selected, a short horn sound will occur when “90” appears.
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature
may be selected with or without the Flash Lamp with
Lock feature. To make your selection, press and release
the SELECT button until “On” or “Off” appears.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature.
To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
When on is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
button until “Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” or “10 min.”
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxiappears.
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. If the
headlights were turned on by this feature they will also Illumin. Approach
turn off when the wipers are turned off. To make your
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
selection, press and release the SELECT button until
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
“ON” or “OFF” appears.
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selecNOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime tion, press and hold the SELECT button until “Off,” “30
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the sec,” “60 sec,” or “90 sec” appears.
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The
Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to
Key Off Power Delay
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And
When this feature is selected, the power window Operating” for system function and operating informaswitches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), DVD tion. To make your selection, push and release the
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), SELECT button until “On” or “Off” appears.
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
Headlamps with Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341

information will display in the audio information/ECO
line of the display when the audio system is on. To make
The EVIC can be changed between English and Metric
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
units of measure. The units apply to the Outside Tem“ON” or “OFF” appears.
perature, Average Fuel Economy, and Distance to Empty.
To make your selection, press and release the SELECT Compass Variance
button until “U.S.” or #METRIC# appears.
Refer to “Compass/Temperature Display” in “Electronic
Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Nav–Turn By Turn — If Equipped
When on enables display of Navigation System street Instrument Panel” for more information.
Display Units In

name, turn direction, and distance to turn information in Calibrate Compass
the EVIC. To make your selection, press and release the
Refer to “Automatic Compass Calibration” in “Electronic
SELECT button until “On” or “Off” appears.
Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Display Fuel Saver — If Equipped
Instrument Panel” for more information.
The “ECO” message is located in the compass/outside
temperature/audio information/ECO display. If Display
Fuel Saver is selected as ON, only the ECO message will
display in the audio information/ECO line of the display.
If Display Fuel Saver is selected as OFF, only the audio

Tire PSI
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Tire
PSI:” displays highlighted in the EVIC. Press the SELECT
button to view a graphic of the vehicle with a tire
pressure value at each corner of the graphic.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Uconnect® 230 – AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND
6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX JACK)

Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.

Uconnect® 230

When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Push the right switch Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio screen.
will remain tuned to the new station until you make Phone Button Uconnect® Phone — If Equipped
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
Push this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature
stations without stopping, until you release it.
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further
SCAN Button
details.
SEEK Buttons

Pushing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, push the SCAN button a second time.
Voice Command Button Uconnect® Phone — If
Equipped
Push this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature (if
equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
screen.
TIME Button
Push the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
and frequency display.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Clock Setting Procedure

INFO Button

1. Push and hold the TIME button until the hours blink. Push the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
SCROLL control knob.
RW/FF
3. After adjusting the hours, push the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
will begin to blink.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
SCROLL control knob. Push the TUNE/SCROLL conTUNE Control
trol knob to save the time change.
5. To exit, push any button/knob or wait five seconds.

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.

The clock can also be set by pushing the SETUP button and
selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in this Setting The Tone, Balance And Fade
display follow the above procedure, starting at step 2.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
MUSIC TYPE Button
mid-range tones.
Pushing this button once will turn on the Music Type
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third mode for five seconds. Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the seconds will allow the program format type to be setreble tones.
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth Music Type information.
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the format types:
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.

Program Type
No program type or undefined
Adult Hits

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

16-Digit Character
Display
None
Adlt Hit

346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Program Type
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music

16-Digit Character
Display
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc

Program Type
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather

16-Digit Character
Display
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R & B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather

By pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347

If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type • DISC Play/Pause —
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
You can toggle between playing the DVD and
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT
button (if equipped).
SETUP Button
Pushing the SETUP button allows you to select between • DVD Play Options — Selecting the DVD Play Options
the following items:
will display the following:
• Subtitle — Repeatedly pushing SELECT will switch
NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are availthrough the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
able on the disc (if equipped).
select an entry and make changes.
• Audio Stream — Repeatedly pushing SELECT will
• DVD Enter — When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
the disc) (if equipped).
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
•
Angle — Repeatedly pushing SELECT will change
up and down the menu (if equipped).
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if
equipped).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Player Defaults — Selecting this item will allow the
user to scroll through the following items and set
The available selections for each of the above entries
defaults according to customer preference.
varies depending upon the disc.
Menu Language — If Equipped
These selections can only be made while playing a
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
DVD.
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
Power — Allows you to turn the power ON and OFF
language supported by disc). If you want to select a
(if equipped).
language not listed, then scroll down and select #other.#
Lock — Locks out rear remote controls (if equipped). Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the
CH1/CH2 — Allows the user to change the mode of number and then push to select.
either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pushing
Audio Language — If Equipped
the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).

NOTE:
•
•
•
•
•

• Set Home Clock — Pushing the SELECT button
allows you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to adjust the hours and then push and
turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the
minutes. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again
to save changes.

Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting #other.# Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349

Subtitle Language — If Equipped

Aspect Ratio — If Equipped

Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting #other.# Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.

Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide
screen, pan scan, and letter box.
AutoPlay — If Equipped

When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
Subtitles — If Equipped
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU
Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
Off or On.
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
Audio DRC — If Equipped
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
dynamic range. The default is set to #High,# and under
customer-preferred settings.
this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the
AM and FM Buttons
setting is #Normal.#
Push the buttons to select AM or FM mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
When you are receiving a station that you wish to button number will display.
commit to pushbutton memory, push the SET button. The Buttons 1 - 6
symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
and push and release that button. If a button is not
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
selected within five seconds after pushing the SET button, the station will continue to play but will not be DISC Button
stored into pushbutton memory.
Pushing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
SET Button — To Set The Pushbutton Memory

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Push
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both
AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into pushbutton
memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be
selected by pushing the pushbutton twice.

AM/FM modes to Disc modes.

Operation Instructions — DISC Mode For CD And
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD – Video
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match for
the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD disc does
not match the region code for the radio DVD player, it
will not play the disc. Customers may take their vehicle

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351

to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the Radio display will show #LOADING DISC# when the disc
player a maximum of five times.
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.

CAUTION!

The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate “Disc
Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is reached.
This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the
DVD player and other radio internal components.

CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD
player mechanism.
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.

Push the EJECT button and the pushbutton
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
Push the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being loaded.
display will show #EJECTING DISC# when the disc is
The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
INSERT DISC. After the radio displays #INSERT DISC,#
insert the CD into the player.
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Push and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
CDs will be ejected from the radio.

TIME Button (CD MODE)

SEEK Button (CD MODE)

RW/FF (CD MODE)

Push the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Push the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pushing and holding the SEEK
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
CD and MP3/MWA modes.

Push and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
another CD button is pushed. The RW (Rewind) button
works in a similar manner.

SCAN Button (CD MODE)

Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files

Push this button to change the display from a large CD
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF. playing time display to a small CD playing time display.

AM Or FM Button (CD MODE)
Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.

Push the SCAN button to scan through each track on the The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
CD currently playing.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
following restrictions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353

• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator #.# and a threeThe MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
character extension)
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator #.# and a threeDVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
character extension)
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as #keep
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
disc open after writing# are most likely multisession
files properly and may be unable to play the file nordiscs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and
• Maximum number of directory levels: 8
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
WMA tracks on that disc.
• Maximum number of files: 255
Supported Media (Disc Types)

• Maximum number of folders: 100

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.

MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3

Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32

MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3

24, 22.05, 16

WMA
Specification
WMA

Sampling Frequency (kHz)
44.1 and 48

Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
Bit Rate (kbps)
48, 64, 96, 128,
160, 192 VBR

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
supported.
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
Playback Of MP3/WMA Files
before writing to the disc.
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium LIST Button — DISC Mode For MP3/WMA Play
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more Pushing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
folder by pushing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
affected by the following:
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer The folder list will time out after five seconds.
to load than non-multisession discs
INFO Button — DISC Mode For MP3/WMA Play
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will Pushing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
increase with more files and folders
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Push the INFO button once more to return to #elapsed NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
time# priority mode.
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
Push and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
and radio will display song titles for each file.
down.
Push and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
to return to #elapsed time# display.
No function.
Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an No function.
MP3/WMA player, an ipod®, or a microphone and
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
utilize the vehicles audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
No function.
Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357

TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)

Dolby®

Push the TIME button to change the display from elapsed Manufactured under license from Dolby® Laboratories.
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display Dolby® and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
for five seconds.
Dolby® Laboratories.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)

Macrovision

No function.

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operating Instructions (Voice Command System) —
If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further details.

DTS™
“DTS™ and “DTS™ 2.0” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

visit the Sirius web site at www.siriusxm.com, or at
www.siriusxm.ca
for Canadian residents.
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Number (ESN/SID)
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
Please have the following information available when
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chilcalling:
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
Number (ESN/SID).
limited coverage in Alaska.
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
Uconnect® (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped

may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or

ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, push the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359

Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number Reception Quality
display will time out in two minutes. Push any button on Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
the radio to exit this screen.
following reasons:
Selecting Uconnect® (Satellite) Mode
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
Push the SAT button until #SAT# appears in the display. A
structure or under a physical obstacle.
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
mode.
form of short audio mutes.
Satellite Antenna
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
cause intermittent reception.
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause • Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within Operating Instructions — Uconnect® (Satellite)
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly Mode
on or above the antenna.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (push and hold again to return
Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
to normal display).
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Push the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio RW/FF
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
stations without stopping, until you release it.
direction of the arrows.
SCAN Button
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Pushing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before conto increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, push the SCAN
MUSIC TYPE Button
button a second time.
SEEK Buttons

Pushing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button
Pushing the INFO button will cycle the display informaor turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if availseconds will allow the program format type to be seable). Also, pushing and holding the INFO button for an
lected.
INFO Button

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music SET Button — To Set The Pushbutton Memory
type.
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
By pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type commit to pushbutton memory, push the SET button. The
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
and push and release that button. If a button is not
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type selected within five seconds after pushing the SET but(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
stored into pushbutton memory.
SETUP Button
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
Pushing the SETUP button allows you to select the repeating the above procedure with this exception: Push
following items:
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
• Display Sirius ID number — Push the AUDIO/
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
memory can be selected by pushing the pushbutton
Sirius subscription.
twice.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding Uconnect® 130
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —
IF EQUIPPED
Refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions (Voice Command System) —
If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.

Uconnect® 130

Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further details.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363

Operating Instructions — Radio Mode

SEEK Buttons

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Push the right switch
ACC position to operate the radio.
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the another selection. Holding either button will bypass
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second stations without stopping, until you release it.
time to turn off the radio.
TIME Button
Electronic Volume Control
Push the TIME button to alternate display of the time and
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 radio frequency.
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
Clock Setting Procedure
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
1. Push and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
set at the same volume level as last played.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

3. After adjusting the hours, push the right side TUNE/ Setting The Tone, Balance And Fade
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will begin to blink.
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
SCROLL control knob. Push the TUNE/SCROLL con- Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
trol knob to save time change.
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
5. To exit, push any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
RW/FF

control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
treble tones.
AM or FM frequencies.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
TUNE Control
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. sound level from the right or left side speakers.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
the front and rear speakers.
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Push
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
AM/FM Button
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
Push the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pushing the pushbutton twice.
SET/RND Button — To Set The Pushbutton
Memory
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
When you are receiving a station that you wish to button number will display.
commit to pushbutton memory, push the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and push and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pushing the

Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
Pushing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode
MP3 Audio Play
and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display
NOTE:
will show the track number, and index time in minutes
and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
position to operate the radio.
DISC Button

• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)

CAUTION!

• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.

Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367

CAUTION! (Continued)
• The Uconnect® 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD
Push the EJECT button to eject the CD.

NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Push the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Push the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pushing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button

Push this button to change the display from a large CD
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

RW/FF

Notes On Playing MP3 Files

Push and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pushed. The RW (Reverse)
button operates in a similar manner.

The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.

AM/FM Button

Supported Media (Disc Types)

Push the button to select either AM or FM mode.

The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.

SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Push this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.

Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
Push the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly
files properly and may be unable to play the file norselected track.
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Push the RND button a second time to stop Random Play.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

Multi-session disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multi-session discs may contain combinations of normal
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as #keep disc open after
• Maximum number of files: 255
writing# are most likely multi-session discs. The use of
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file multi-session for CD audio or MP3 playback may result
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers in longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign Supported MP3 File Formats
a number instead. With a maximum number of files, The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extenexceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this dis- extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
play.)
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator #.# and a threeMP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
character extension)
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator #.# and a three- rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR
character extension)
bit rate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

MPEG Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3

Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32

MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3

24, 22.05, 16

Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8

Playback Of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.

Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode

TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)

The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which Push this button to change the display to time of day. The
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
MP3 player, or iPod®, and utilize the vehicle’s audio OFF).
system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pushing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO

Uconnect® 130

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Push the right switch
screen.
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make Phone Button Uconnect® Phone — If Equipped
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
Push this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature
stations without stopping, until you release it.
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” in “UnderVoice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
SEEK Buttons

Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Fea- If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
tures Of Your Vehicle”.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
Voice Command Button Uconnect® Phone — If
screen.
Equipped
Push this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature TIME Button
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” in “Under- Push the TIME button to alternate display of the time and
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
radio frequency.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

starting at step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, push the SETUP button and then follow the above
1. Push and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
procedure, starting at step 2.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
INFO Button
SCROLL control knob.
Push the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
3. After adjusting the hours, push the right side TUNE/ letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
will begin to blink.
RW/FF
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Push the TUNE/SCROLL con- Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
trol knob to save time change.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
5. To exit, push any button/knob or wait five seconds. AM or FM frequencies.
The clock can also be set by pushing the SETUP button. TUNE Control
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, push the
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the front and rear speakers.
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the MUSIC TYPE Button
mid-range tones.
Pushing this button once will turn on the Music Type
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third mode for five seconds. Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
treble tones.
Music Type information.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Setting The Tone, Balance And Fade

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia

16-Digit Character
Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga

Program Type
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

16-Digit Character
Display
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377

the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL conBy pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is
trol knob. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
save time change.
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
AM/FM Button
mode.
Push the button to select either AM or FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be SET/RND Button — To Set The Pushbutton
Memory
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pushing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
• Set Clock — Pushing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
hours, push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust

When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, push the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
station and push and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pushing the SET/RND
button, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Push

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pushing the pushbutton twice.

Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding • This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
button number will display.
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
Buttons 1 - 6
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
stations).
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
DISC/AUX Button
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
Pushing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD

CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Uconnect® 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
(Continued)

Push the EJECT button to eject the CD.

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SEEK Button

AM/FM Button

Push the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Push the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pushing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.

Push the button to select either AM or FM mode.

TIME Button

Push the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.

Push this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Push the SET/RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
RW/FF
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
Push and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
another CD button is pushed. The RW (Reverse) button file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricworks in a similar manner.
tions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381

Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)

display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than • Level 1: 12 (including a separator #.# and a threecharacter extension)
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor- • Level 2: 31 (including a separator #.# and a threemally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
character extension)
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

Multi-session disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multi-session discs may contain combinations of normal
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
• Maximum number of files: 255
Discs created with an option such as #keep disc open after
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file writing# are most likely multi-session discs. The use of
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers multi-session for CD audio or MP3 playback may result
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to in longer disc loading times.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.

MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3

Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32

Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8

MPEG-2 Audio
24, 22.05, 16
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
Layer
3
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
VBR bit rates.
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
LIST Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play
Playback Of MP3 Files

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected Pushing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
by the following:
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
folder by pushing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
CD-R media
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will The folder list will time out after five seconds.
increase with more files and folders

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INFO Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play

Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.

Pushing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
Push the INFO button once more to return to #elapsed is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
time# priority mode.
down.
Push and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
and the radio will display song titles for each file.
Push and hold the INFO button again for three seconds Push this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
to return to #elapsed time# display.
ignition is OFF).
Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
Uconnect® (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcastMP3 player or iPod® and utilize the vehicle’s audio ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
system to amplify the source and play through the coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
vehicle speakers.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385

sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil- Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios. Number (ESN/SID)
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has Please have the following information available when
calling:
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.siriusxm.com, or at
www.siriusxm.ca for Canadian residents.

1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, push the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Push any button on
the radio to exit this screen.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Selecting Uconnect® (Satellite) Mode

• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.

Push the SAT button until #SAT# appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio • Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
mode.
cause intermittent reception.
Satellite Antenna

• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects Operating Instructions — Uconnect® (Satellite) Mode
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within ACC position to operate the radio.
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly SEEK Buttons
on or above the antenna.
Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
Reception Quality
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Push the right switch
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
following reasons:
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking stations without stopping, until you release it.
structure or under a physical obstacle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387

SCAN Button

TUNE Control (Rotary)

Pushing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con- to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, push the SCAN
MUSIC TYPE Button
button a second time.
Pushing this button once will turn on the Music Type
INFO Button
mode for five seconds. Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button
Pushing the INFO button will cycle the display informa- or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail- seconds will allow the program format type to be seable). Also, pushing and holding the INFO button for an lected.
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
Song Title all of the time (push and hold again to return
type.
to normal display).
By pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type
RW/FF
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons channel with the same selected Music Type name.
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
direction of the arrows.
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SETUP Button
Pushing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
• Display Sirius ID number — Push the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.

You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Push
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pushing the pushbutton
twice.

SET Button — To Set The Pushbutton Memory

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to button number will display.
commit to pushbutton memory, push the SET button. The Buttons 1 - 6
symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
and push and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pushing the SET but- Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be Equipped
stored into pushbutton memory.
Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389

iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

Connecting The iPod® Or External USB Device

This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be Use the connection cable to connect an iPod® or external
plugged into the USB port, located in the center console. USB device to the vehicles USB/AUX connector port
which is located in the center console.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
NOTE:
• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
Uconnect® Supplement Manual for iPod® or external
USB device support capability.
• Connecting an iPod® or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
plays media, but does not use the iPod®/MP3 control
feature to control the connected device.

Center Console USB/AUX Connector Port

Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
the vehicles iPod®/USB/MP3 control system (iPod® or
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

external USB device may take a few minutes to connect), • The audio device can be controlled using the radio
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod® contents.
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
pushing radio switches, as described below.
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely disaudio device).
charged, it may not communicate with the iPod®/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod®/USB/
Using Radio Buttons
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
To get into the iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode and
Using This Feature
access a connected audio device, either push the “AUX”
By using an iPod® cable, or an external USB device to button on the radio faceplate or push the VR button and
connect to the USB port:
say #USB# or #Switch to USB.# Once in the iPod®/USB/
MP3 control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
Play Mode
etc.) information on the radio display.
When switched to iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode, the
iPod® or external USB device automatically starts Play
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391

mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio • A single push backward << RW or forward FF>> will
faceplate may be used to control the iPod® or external
jump backward or forward respectively, for five secUSB device and display data:
onds.
• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or • Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
previous track.
previous or next track. Pushing the SEEK >> button
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
list, or push the VR button and say #Next or Previous
playing a track, skips to the next track or push the VR
Track.#
button and say #Next Track.#
• While a track is playing, push the INFO button to see
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click,
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
will jump to the previous track in the list or push the
for that track. Pushing the INFO button again jumps to
VR button and say #Previous Track.#
the next screen of data for that track. Once all screens
have been viewed, the last INFO button push will go
• Jump backward in the current track by pushing and
back to the play mode screen on the radio.
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW button
long enough will jump to the beginning of the current
• Pushing the REPEAT button will change the audio
track.
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
• Jump forward in the current track by pushing and
push the VR button and say #Repeat ON# or #Repeat
holding the FF>> button.
Off.#
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Push the SCAN button to use iPod®/USB/MP3 device scan mode, which will play the first ten seconds of
each track in the current list and then forward to the
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
desired track, when it is playing the track, push the
SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pushing the
<< SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previous
and next tracks.

List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pushing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
audio device.
TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions in
a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio device
or external USB device.

• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
Pushing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and • Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise
(backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod® or external USB
track detail on the radio display. Once the track to be
device, or push the VR button and say #Shuffle ON# or
played is highlighted on the radio display, push the
#Shuffle Off.# If the RND icon is showing on the radio
TUNE control knob to select and start playing the
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
track. Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll
through the list faster. During fast scroll, a slight delay
in updating the information on the radio display may
be noticeable.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393

During all List modes, the iPod® displays all lists in To exit List mode without selecting a track, push the
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the bottom of same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode.
the list, just turn the wheel backward (counterclockwise) LIST button: The LIST button will display the top level
to get to the track faster.
menu of the iPod® or external USB device.
In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
• Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod® or external
to be selected and push the TUNE control knob. This
USB device:
will display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
• Preset 1 – Playlists
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
track in that list. Not all iPod® or external USB device
• Preset 2 – Artists
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
• Preset 3 – Albums
MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your audio
• Preset 4 – Genres
device.
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
• Preset 6 – Podcasts

Pushing a PRESET button will display the current list on
the top line and the first item in that list on the second
line.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA)

CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod® or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s
guidelines.
• Placing items on the iPod® or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod® or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.

Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the
Uconnect® phone system.
Refer to the Uconnect® Radio Supplement for further
information on Bluetooth® connectivity.
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
To enter BTSA mode, push either “AUX” button on the
radio or push the VR button and say “Bluetooth Streaming Audio.”

WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod® or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395

Play Mode

Next Track

When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect®
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
Uconnect® phone system, but just one can be selected
and played.

Use the SEEK UP button, or push the VR button on the
radio and say “Next Track,” to jump to the next music
track on your cellular phone.

Selecting A Different Audio Device
1. Push the PHONE button to begin.

Previous Track
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or push the VR button on
the radio and say “Previous Track,” to jump to the
previous music track on your cellular phone.
Browse

Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth® Streaming
2. After the #Ready# prompt and following the beep, say Audio (BTSA) device. Only the current song that is
#Setup#, then say #Select Audio Devices.#
playing will display info.
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the
Uconnect® phone system to list the audio devices.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear push-button in the center and controls the volume and
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom
access the switches.
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS

Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
CD/HDD/AUX, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397

Radio Operation

multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
center button will select the next available CD in the
player.

Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
The button located in the center of the left-hand control To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro- precautions:
grammed in the radio preset button.
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
CD Player
surface.
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
track on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once
wiping from center to edge.
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within eight 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
seconds after the current track begins to play.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
or anti-static sprays.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no 5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.

Regulatory And Safety Information

7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become USA/CANADA
too high.
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coat- is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits.
ing removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) Nevertheless, the wireless radio shall be used in such a
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human
good disc before considering disc player service.
body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recomUnder certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
mendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated community.
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation when not
using Uconnect® (if equipped).
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399

The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However,
the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If
you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask
for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. this device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.

suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie • If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

by turning the equipment off and on, the user is Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician
for help.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
Manual Temperature Control

The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of
outer rotary dials and inner push knobs.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401

NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems lower
than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt
or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
reducing air conditioning performance.

Blower Control

Rotate this control to regulate the
amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode. The
blower speed increases as you move
the control to the right from the “O”
(OFF) position. There are seven blower Air Conditioning Control
speeds.

Push this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light will illuminate when
the Air Conditioning system is engaged.
Rotating the dial left into the blue area of
the scale indicates cooler temperatures,
while rotating right into the red area
indicates warmer temperatures.

Temperature Control

Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Rotating the dial left
into the blue area of the scale indicates
cooler temperatures, while rotating
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
right into the red area indicates
until the engine has been running for about ten seconds.
warmer temperatures.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Panel

• MAX A/C

For maximum cooling, turn on the A/C and recirculation
buttons at the same time.
• ECONOMY MODE

Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
airflow.

NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed
If economy mode is desired, push the A/C button to turn
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers
OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
for maximum airflow to the rear.
move the temperature control to the desired temperature.
Bi-Level
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
Rotate this control to choose from several patterns of air distribution. You
can select either a primary mode as
identified by the symbols on the control, or a blend of two of these modes.
The closer the setting is to a particular
symbol, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.

NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403

NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix,
Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
Conditioning (A/C) button is not pushed. This dehusmall amount flowing through the defrost and
midifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve
side window demist outlets.
fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
Mix
Recirculation Control
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
Pushing the Recirculation Control button will
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
put the system in recirculation mode. This can
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the
be used when outside conditions such as
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are preswhile reducing moisture on the windshield.
ent. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the
Defrost
control button to illuminate.
Floor

Air is directed through the windshield and side NOTE:
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
mum blower and temperature settings for best windthe inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
shield and side window defrosting.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
weather will cause windows to fog on the inside, Equipped
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select
the outside air position for maximum defogging.
• The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging
when the recirculation button is pushed and the mode
control is set to panel or Bi-Level.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
• When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.

Automatic Temperature Control

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405

Automatic Operation

Temperature Control

The Automatic Temperature Control system automatically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at
the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.

Dial in the temperature you would
like the system to maintain by rotating
the Temperature Control knob. Once
Operation of the system is quite simple.
the comfort level is selected, the system will maintain that level automatiTurn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and the
cally using the heating system. Should
Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO.
the desired comfort level require air
NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat
conditioning, the system will automatically make the
occupants only.
adjustment.
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
the “O” (OFF) position on the blower control stops the
system completely and closes the outside air intake.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The recommended setting for maximum comfort is 72° F • If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
(22° C) for the average person; however, this may vary.
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located
in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or
NOTE:
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
• The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime
without affecting automatic operation.
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
reducing air conditioning performance.
• Pushing the Air Conditioning Control button while in
AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button • While operating in AUTO, the system will not autoto flash three times and then turn off. This indicates
matically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on the
that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the
windshield. The defrost mode must be manually seair conditioning is not necessary.
lected to clear the windshield and side glass.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407

Blower Control

Manual Operation
For full automatic operation or for
automatic blower operation, turn the
knob to the AUTO position. In manual
mode, there are seven blower speeds
that can be individually selected. In off
position, the blower will shut off.

This system offers a full complement of manual override
features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic. This means the operator can override
the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left).
NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
Operation Chart that follows for details.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409

The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there
change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control is a difference in temperature between the upper and
knob (on the right) to one of the following positions:
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
• Panel
cool conditions.
Air is directed through the outlets in the instru• Floor
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
airflow.
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed
side window demist outlets.
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers
for maximum airflow to the rear.
• Mix
• Bi-Level

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort
while reducing moisture on the windshield.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Defrost

Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting.

• Recirculation Control

The system will automatically control recirculation. However, pushing the Recirculation
Control button will put the system in recirculation mode. This can be used when outside
conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity
• Air Conditioner Control
are present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in
Push this button to turn on the air the control button to illuminate.
conditioning during manual operation
NOTE:
only. When the air conditioning is
turned on, cool dehumidified air will • When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
flow through the outlets selected with
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
the Mode control dial. Push this button a second time to turn OFF the air
conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when
manual compressor operation is selected.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411

• In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may • Most of the time, when in Automatic Operation, you
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
can temporarily put the system into Recirculation
mode by pushing the Recirculation button. However,
mode is not allowed in the defrost mode in order to
under certain conditions, while in Automatic mode,
improve window clearing. Recirculation will be disthe system is blowing air out the defrost vents. When
abled automatically if in defrost mode.
these conditions are present, and the Recirculation
• Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows
button is pushed, the indicator will flash and then turn
to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog,
off. This tells you that you are unable to go into
push the Recirculation button to return to outside air.
Recirculation mode at this time. If you would like the
Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
system to go into Recirculation mode, you must first
interior air to condense on windows and hamper
move the Mode knob to Panel, Bi-Level, Floor, or Mix
visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow
and then push the Recirculation button. This feature
recirculation to be selected while in defrost mode.
reduces the possibility of window fogging.
Attempting to use recirculation while in this mode will
cause the LED in the control button to blink and then
turn off.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vacation Storage

Operating Tips

Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
Summer Operation
fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure
The engine cooling system must be protected with a adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro- of compressor damage when the system is started again.
sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
Window Fogging
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly reStandard MS-12106 and 50% water is recommended. moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side winVehicle” for proper coolant selection.
dow fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed.
Winter Operation
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months rainy or humid weather.
is not recommended because it may cause window
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
fogging.
long periods as fogging may occur.
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413

Side Window Demisters

A/C Air Filter — If Equipped

A side window demister outlet is located at each end of
the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct
air toward the side windows when the system is in the
Floor, Mix, or Defrost mode. The air is directed at the area
of the windows through which you view the outside
mirrors.

The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from
entering the cabin. The filter acts on air coming from
outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the passenger compartment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for A/C Air Filter service
information or see your authorized dealer for service.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedules” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for filter service intervals.

Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
! STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420

▫ Shifting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425

▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . .420

▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426

▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .421

▫ Reverse Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428

▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 ! AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or
−29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422

▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .431

▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424

▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431

! ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .424
! MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . . .424

▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

416 STARTING AND OPERATING

! AUTOSTICK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439

▫ Side Step Removal — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . .450

▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439

▫ The Basics Of Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . .451

! FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION (COMMANDTRAC I® OR ROCK-TRAC®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441

▫ When To Use 4L (Low) Range. . . . . . . . . . . . .452

▫ Operating Instructions/Precautions . . . . . . . .441
▫ Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443

▫ Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation. . .452
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . .453

▫ Shifting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445

▫ Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other
High Points) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454

! TRAC-LOK® REAR AXLE — IF EQUIPPED . . .446

▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457

! AXLE LOCK (TRU–LOK®) — RUBICON
MODELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446

▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460

▫ After Driving Off-Road . . .
! ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT —
! POWER STEERING . . . . . . .
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check
! ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
! PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . .
! OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .466

STARTING AND OPERATING 417

! BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468

▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487

! ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .469

▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .490

▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .469

▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .492

▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .471

▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .493

▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 ! TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .498
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472

▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498

▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .476

▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500

▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .477

▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .501

▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483

▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501

▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped . . .485
! TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .487

▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

418 STARTING AND OPERATING

▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507

▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .527

▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508

▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527

▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509

▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528

! TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .510

▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528

! TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .512

▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .529

! TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . . .513 ! ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
▫ Base TPM System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517

▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530

▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .520

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .531

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 ! VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
! FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525

▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532

▫ 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 ! TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526

▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .534

▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526

▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 419

▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
! RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545

▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . .553

▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546

▫ Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554

▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

420 STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.

WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEUTRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting the
vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch
pedal is pressed to the floor.
Four-Wheel Drive Models Only
In 4L mode, this vehicle will start regardless of whether
or not the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor. This feature
enhances off-road performance by allowing the vehicle to
start when in 4L without having to press the clutch pedal.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 421

The “4WD Indicator Light” will illuminate when the Tip Start Feature — Automatic Transmission Only
transfer case has been shifted into this mode.
Turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
will continue to run, but will automatically disengage
Start the vehicle with the shift lever in the PARK position
itself when the engine is running. If the engine fails to
(vehicle can also be started in NEUTRAL). Apply the
start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 secbrake before shifting to any driving range.
onds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
Normal Starting
position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
pedal.
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
Cycle the ignition switch to the START position and an externally powered electric engine block heater (availrelease when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
within 10 seconds, cycle the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

422 STARTING AND OPERATING

If Engine Fails To Start

WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and, once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
(Continued)

• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Without Tip Start — Manual Transmission Only
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the
engine. This should clear any excess fuel in case the
engine is flooded.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 423

With Tip Start — Automatic Transmission Only

CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running
smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, repeat the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures.

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

424 STARTING AND OPERATING

After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED

WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt AC
electrical cord could cause electrocution.

The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
WARNING!
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one You or others could be injured if you leave the
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine. vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should alThe engine block heater cord is found under the hood ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
bundled in front of the battery tray.
especially on an incline.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 425

CAUTION!
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause
abnormal wear on the clutch.
NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience increased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid
warms up. This is normal.

5
Shift Pattern

Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator
pedal.
You should always use first gear when starting from a
standing position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

426 STARTING AND OPERATING

vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both loaded or pulling a trailer these recommended up-shift
fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted as speeds may not apply.
listed in recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds

Engine
3.6L

Speeds
Accel.
Cruise

Manual Transmission
1 to 2
15 (24)
10 (16)

Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
2 to 3
3 to 4
24 (39)
34 (55)
19 (31)
27 (43)

4 to 5
47 (76)
37 (60)

5 to 6
56 (90)
41 (66)

NOTE: Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for speed. Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to
2H and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L would be signifi- avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch.
cantly less.

WARNING!

Downshifting
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is
recommended to preserve brakes when driving down
steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time
provides better acceleration when you desire to resume

Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip, and the vehicle could skid.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 427

CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Skipping gears and downshifting into lower gears
at higher vehicle speeds can damage the engine
and clutch systems, Any attempt to shift into lower
gear with clutch pedal depressed may result damage to the clutch system. Shifting into lower gear
and releasing the clutch may result in engine
damage.
• When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the
engine which can cause engine damage, and/or
clutch damage, even if the clutch pedal is pressed.
If transfer case is in low range the vehicle speeds to
cause engine and clutch damage are significantly
lower.

• Failure to follow the maximum recommended
downshifting speeds may cause the engine damage
and/or damage the clutch, even if the clutch pedal
is pressed.
• Descending a hill in low range with clutch pedal
depressed could result in clutch damage
Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds

CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed
and/or damage the clutch disc, even if the clutch
pedal is pressed.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

428 STARTING AND OPERATING

Gear Selection
Maximum
Speed

Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
6 to 5
5 to 4
4 to 3
3 to 2
80 (129)
70 (113)
50 (81)
30 (48)

2 to 1
15 (24)

NOTE: Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for driver will feel a firm “click” as the shifter passes the
2H and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L would be signifi- “knock-over”). Complete the shift by pulling the shift
lever into REVERSE.
cantly less.
The “knock-over” provides a resistance to the driver
from accidentally entering the REVERSE shift area and
To shift into REVERSE, bring the vehicle to a complete
warns the driver that they are about to shift the transstop. Press the clutch and pause briefly to allow the gear
mission into REVERSE. Due to this feature, a slow shift to
train to stop rotating. Beginning from the NEUTRAL
REVERSE can be perceived as a high shift effort.
position, move the shift lever in one quick, smooth
motion straight across and into the REVERSE area (the
Reverse Shifting

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 429

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED

WARNING!

CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.

NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

430 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key.
Once the key is removed, the transmission is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 431

out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interpedal must be pressed.
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission — If
OFF (key removal) position. The key can only be re- Equipped
moved from the ignition when the ignition is in the
The transmission gear position display (located in the
LOCK/OFF position, and once removed the transmission
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
is locked in PARK.
You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interkey in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety lock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
service.
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
Key Ignition Park Interlock

self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
hundred miles (kilometers).
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

432 STARTING AND OPERATING

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual shifts can
be made using the Autostick shift control (refer to
#AutoStick# in this section). Moving the shift lever to the
left or right (-/+) while in the DRIVE position will
manually select the transmission gear and will display
the current gear in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
Shift Lever

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 433

Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
vehicle in this range.
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
NOTE:
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
• After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow brake.
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
especially important when the engine is cold.
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
• If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffithe ignition to the LOCK/OFF position before restart- cult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added
ing. Transmission gear engagement may be delayed precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
after restarting the engine if the ignition is not cycled downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
to the LOCK/OFF position first.
grade.
Gear Ranges

PARK (P)

NOTE: On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transfer case is in a drive position.
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

434 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal
released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK
before leaving the vehicle.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 435

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

436 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position.

• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.

• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.

NEUTRAL (N)
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posiperiods with the engine running. The engine may be
tion:
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 437

DRIVE (D)

WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.

CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.

This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
and third gears, direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick® shift
control (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section for further
information) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

438 STARTING AND OPERATING

Transmission Limp Home Mode

2. Shift the transmission into PARK.

Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop.
After the vehicle has stopped, the transmission will
remain in second gear regardless of which forward gear
is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle
to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without
damaging the transmission.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.

NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
dealer service is required.
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 439

This system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions,
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situacontrolled Overdrive (fifth gear). The transmission will
tions.
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following conditions are present:
Operation
Overdrive Operation

• The shift lever is in the DRIVE position.

When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, the
transmission will operate automatically, shifting between
• Vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
the five available gears. To engage AutoStick, simply tap
• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
the shift lever to the right or left (+/-) while in the DRIVE
position. Tapping (-) to enter AutoStick mode will downAUTOSTICK
shift the transmission to the next lower gear, while using
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature (+) to enter AutoStick mode will retain the current gear.
providing manual shift control, giving you more control When AutoStick is active, the current transmission gear is
of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine displayed in the instrument cluster.
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or
and improve overall vehicle performance.
down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver,
unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

440 STARTING AND OPERATING

result. It will remain in the selected gear until another • You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.
upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described
Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second
below.
gear. Starting out in second gear can be helpful in
snowy or icy conditions.
• The transmission will automatically upshift when necessary to prevent engine over-speed.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
• Heavily pressing the accelerator pedal will generate an
automatic downshift (for improved acceleration) when • Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged.
reasonable.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
AutoStick is engaged.
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
NOTE: When the transfer case is in the 4L (Low) range,
display the current gear.
the transmission will shift automatically (but no higher
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first than the displayed gear).
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver To disengage AutoStick mode, hold the shift lever to the
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
right (+) until #D# is once again displayed in the instruvehicle is accelerated.
ment cluster. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick
mode at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 441

Operating Instructions/Precautions

WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION (COMMANDTRAC I® OR ROCK-TRAC®)

The transfer case provides four mode positions:
• 2H (Two-wheel drive high range)

• 4H (Four-wheel drive high range)
• N (Neutral)

• 4L (Four-wheel drive low range)

WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position completely
can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and
vehicle control. You could have a collision. Do not
drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully
engaged.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

442 STARTING AND OPERATING

rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. The 4H and 4L
positions are intended for loose, slippery road surfaces
only and not intended for normal driving. Driving in the
4H and 4L positions on hard-surfaced roads will cause
increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components. Refer to “Shifting Procedures” in this section for
further information on shifting into 4H or 4L.

Four-Wheel Drive Shift Controls

The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the instrument
cluster) alerts the driver that the vehicle is in four-wheel
drive, and the front and rear driveshafts are locked
together. The light will illuminate when the transfer case
is shifted into the 4H position.

The transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H NOTE: Do not attempt to shift when only the front or
position for normal street and highway conditions such rear wheels are spinning. The transfer case is not
equipped with a synchronizer, and the front and rear
as hard-surfaced roads.
driveshaft speeds must be equal for a shift to take place.
In the event that additional traction is required, the
Shifting while the front or rear wheels are spinning at
transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the
different speeds can cause damage to the transfer case.
front and rear driveshafts together, forcing the front and
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 443

When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed will
be approximately three times (four times for Rubicon
models) that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road
speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and
cause damage to the transfer case.

WARNING! (Continued)
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear drive
shaft from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle
to roll, even if the automatic transmission is in PARK
(or manual transmission is in gear). The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.

Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping Shift Positions
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
4WD system mode position, see the information below:

WARNING!

2H Position

You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging

This range is used for normal street and highway driving
on hard-surfaced roads.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

444 STARTING AND OPERATING

4H Position

4L Position

This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together,
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. This range (4H) provides additional traction for
loose, slippery road surfaces and should not be used on
dry pavement.

This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together,
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. This range (4L) provides additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the instrument
cluster) will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted
into the 4H position.
N (Neutral) Position

CAUTION!
Exceeding 25 mph (40 km/h) while the transfer case is
engaged in 4L may result in an engine overspeed
condition and engine damage.

This range disengages the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain. It is to be used for flat towing behind The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the instrument
another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Start- cluster) will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted
ing and Operating” for further information.
into the 4L position.
NOTE: When in 4WD, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
display in the instrument cluster.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 445

Shifting Procedure
2H to 4H or 4H to 2H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the
vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in motion,
the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you
momentarily release the accelerator pedal after completing the shift. Apply a constant force when shifting the
transfer case lever.

NOTE: Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur due to the mating teeth not being properly aligned.
Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred
method is with the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L
with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h).

4H to 4L or 4L to 4H
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift
an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL (N), or press
the clutch pedal on a manual transmission. While the
vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the
transfer case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not
pause with the transfer case in N (Neutral). Once the shift
is completed, place the automatic transmission into
DRIVE or release the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

446 STARTING AND OPERATING

TRAC-LOK® REAR AXLE — IF EQUIPPED

AXLE LOCK (TRU–LOK®) — RUBICON MODELS

The Trac-Lok® rear axle provides a constant driving force The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instrument
to both rear wheels and reduces wheel spin caused by the panel (to the left of the steering column).
loss of traction at one driving wheel. If traction differs
between the two rear wheels, the differential automatically proportions the usable torque by providing more
torque to the wheel that has traction.
Trac-Lok® is especially helpful during slippery driving
conditions. With both rear wheels on a slippery surface, a
slight application of the accelerator will supply maximum traction.

WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential, never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground. The vehicle may drive through the rear
wheel remaining on the ground and cause you to lose
control of your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Axle Lock Switch

STARTING AND OPERATING 447

This feature will only activate when the following con- Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4L
ditions are met:
(Low) range, or the ignition switch is turned to the OFF
position.
• Key in ignition, vehicle in 4L (Low) range.
ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT — IF
• Vehicle speed should be 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
EQUIPPED
To activate the system, press the bottom of the AXLE
LOCK switch once to lock the rear axle only (the “Rear Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic disconAxle Lock Indicator Light” will illuminate), press the necting stabilizer/sway bar. This system allows greater
bottom of the switch again to lock the front axle (the front suspension travel in off-road situations.
“Front Axle Lock Indicator Light” will illuminate). When This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR switch
the rear axle is locked, pressing the switch again will lock located on the instrument panel (to the left of the steering
or unlock the front axle.
column).
NOTE: The indicator lights will flash until the axles are
fully locked or unlocked.
To unlock the axles, press the top of the AXLE LOCK
switch.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

448 STARTING AND OPERATING

sway bar should remain in on-road mode during normal
driving conditions.

WARNING!

Sway Bar Switch

Press the SWAY BAR switch to activate the system. Press
the switch again to deactivate the system. The “Sway Bar
Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) will
illuminate when the bar is disconnected. The “Sway Bar
Indicator Light” will flash during activation transition, or
when activation conditions are not met. The stabilizer/

Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive on
hard-surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph
(29 km/h); you may lose control of the vehicle, which
could result in serious injury. The front stabilizer bar
enhances vehicle stability and is necessary for maintaining control of the vehicle. The system monitors
vehicle speed and will attempt to reconnect the
stabilizer bar at speeds over 18 mph (29 km/h). This is
indicated by a flashing or solid “Sway Bar Indicator
Light.” Once vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph
(22 km/h), the system will once again attempt to
return to off-road mode.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 449

To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to either 4H
or 4L and press the SWAY BAR switch to obtain the
off-road position. Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation”
in “Starting and Operating” for further information. The
“Sway Bar Indicator Light” will flash until the stabilizer/
sway bar has been fully disconnected.

WARNING!
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to on-road
mode, the “Sway Bar Indicator Light” will flash in
the instrument cluster and vehicle stability is greatly
reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle over
18 mph (29 km/h). Driving faster than 18 mph
(29 km/h) may cause loss of control of the vehicle,
which could result in serious injury. Contact your
local authorized dealer for assistance.

NOTE: The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked
due to left and right suspension height differences. This
condition is due to driving surface differences or vehicle
loading. In order for the stabilizer/sway bar to
disconnect/reconnect, the right and left halves of the bar
must be aligned. This alignment may require that the ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from side Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
to side.
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
To return to on-road mode, press the SWAY BAR switch
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
again.
ordinary cars.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

450 STARTING AND OPERATING

An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover.

OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Side Step Removal — If Equipped
NOTE: Prior to off-road usage, the side steps should be
removed to prevent damage.
1. Remove the two nuts from the bodyside.

Bodyside Nut
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 451

2. Remove one bolt from the underside of the vehicle.

Underside Bolt

3. Remove the side step assembly.

The Basics Of Off-Road Driving
You will encounter many types of terrain driving offroad. You should be familiar with the terrain and area
before proceeding. There are many types of surface
conditions: hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand,
mud, snow and ice. Every surface has a different effect on
your vehicle’s steering, handling and traction. Controlling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road
driving, so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel
and maintain a good driving posture. Avoid sudden
accelerations, turns or braking. In most cases, there are no
road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights. Therefore,
you will need to use your own good judgment on what is
safe and what is not. When on a trail, you should always
be looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in
terrain. The key is to plan your future driving route while
remembering what you are currently driving over.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

452 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h)
should be avoided when in 4L (Low) range.

Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials. The heat from your vehicle
exhaust system could cause a fire.

CAUTION!

WARNING!
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down
cargo. Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an
off-road situation.

Do not use 4L (Low) range when operating the
vehicle on dry pavement. Driveline hardware damage can result.
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation

Many off-road driving conditions require the simultaneous use of the brake and throttle (two-footed driving).
When climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects,
When To Use 4L (Low) Range
using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the
When off-road driving, shift into 4L (Low) for additional
vehicle from jerking or lurching. This technique is also
traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain,
used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a
ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase low
steep incline.
speed pulling power. This range should be limited to
extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, steep inclines, or sand where additional low speed pulling power
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 453

Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand

Mud

Snow

Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires
and is very difficult to get through. You should use
second gear (manual transmission), or DRIVE (automatic
transmission), with the transfer case in the 4L (Low)
position to maintain your momentum. If you start to slow
to a stop, try turning your steering wheel no more than a
1/4 turn quickly back and forth for additional traction.
Mud holes pose an increased threat of vehicle damage
and getting stuck. They are normally full of debris from
previous vehicles getting stuck. As a good practice before
entering any mud hole, get out and determine how deep
it is, if there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle
can be safely recovered if stuck.

In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at
slower speeds, shift the transmission into a low gear and
the transfer case into 4L (Low) if necessary. Do not shift to
a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway. Overrevving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will
be lost. If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your
steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and
forth, while still applying throttle. This will allow the
tires to get a fresh #bite# and help maintain your momentum.

CAUTION!
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high
engine RPM or vehicle speeds, because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control.

Sand
Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire
pressure. When crossing soft, sandy spots in a trail,
maintain your vehicle’s momentum and do not stop. The

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

454 STARTING AND OPERATING

key to driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire
pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle’s momentum. If you are
going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes,
reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi (103
kPa) to allow for a greater tire surface area. Reduced tire
pressure will drastically improve your traction and handling while driving on the soft sand, but you must return
the tires to normal air pressure before driving on pavement or other hard surfaces. Be sure you have a way to
reinflate the tires prior to reducing the pressure.

CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and
total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire
unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce
your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.

Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High
Points)
While driving off-road, you will encounter many types of
terrain. These varying types of terrain bring different
types of obstacles. Before proceeding, review the path
ahead to determine the correct approach and your ability
to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong.
Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel, bring the
vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle
forward until it makes contact with the object. Apply the
throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and
ease the vehicle up and over the object.

WARNING!
Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system
loading which could cause you to loose control of
your vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 455

Using A Spotter

CAUTION!

There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle
or determine the correct path. Determining the correct • Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large
enough to strike your axles or undercarriage.
path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting
•
Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large
many obstacles. In these cases have someone guide you
enough to contact the door sills.
over, through, or around the obstacle. Have the person
stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see
Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout Or Rut
the obstacle, watch your tires and undercarriage, and
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large
guide you through.
rut, the angled approach is the key to maintaining your
Crossing Large Rocks
vehicle’s mobility. Approach these obstacles at a 45When approaching large rocks, choose a path which degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle
ensures you drive over the largest of them with your independently. You need to use caution when crossing
tires. This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle. large obstacles with steep sides. Do not attempt to cross
The tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great
wall and is designed to take the abuse. Always look enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get
ahead and make every effort to cross the large rocks with caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a
45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use the removed
your tires.
dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

456 STARTING AND OPERATING

You should now be able to drive out following the trench
you just created at a 45-degree angle.

CAUTION!

WARNING!

Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter
than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will
become high-centered.

There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing
an obstacle, at any angle, with steep sides.
Crossing Logs
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approximately 10 to 15 degrees). This allows one front tire to be
on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the
log. While climbing the log, modulate your brake and
accelerator to avoid spinning the log out from under your
tires. Then ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes.

Getting High-Centered
If you get hung up or high-centered on an object, get out
of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is
hung up on, where it is contacting the underbody and
what is the best direction to recover the vehicle. Depending on what you are in contact with, jack the vehicle up
and place a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off
of the high point when you let the vehicle down. You can
also try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off
the object.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 457

CAUTION!
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects
increases the risk of underbody damage.
Hill Climbing
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good understanding of your abilities and your vehicle’s limitations.
Hills can cause serious problems. Some are just too steep
to climb and should not be attempted. You should always
feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities. You
should always climb hills straight up and down. Never
attempt to climb a hill on an angle.
Before Climbing A Steep Hill
As you approach a hill, consider its grade or steepness.
Determine if it is too steep. Look to see what the traction
is on the hill side trail. Is the trail straight up and down?
What is on top and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks,

branches or other obstacles on the path? Can you safely
recover the vehicle if something goes wrong? If everything looks good and you feel confident, shift the transmission into a lower gear with 4L (Low) engaged, and
proceed with caution, maintaining your momentum as
you climb the hill.
Driving Up Hill
Once you have determined your ability to proceed and
have shifted into the appropriate gear, line your vehicle
up for the straightest possible run. Accelerate with an
easy constant throttle and apply more power as you start
up the hill. Do not race forward into a steep grade; the
abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control. If
the front end begins to bounce, ease off the throttle
slightly to bring all four tires back on the ground. As you
approach the crest of the hill, ease off the throttle and
slowly proceed over the top. If the wheels start to slip as
you approach the crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

458 STARTING AND OPERATING

and maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no
more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth. This will
provide a fresh #bite# into the surface and will usually
provide enough traction to complete the climb. If you do
not make it to the top, place the vehicle in REVERSE and
back straight down the grade using engine resistance
along with the vehicle brakes.

WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn
around on a steep grade. Driving across an incline
increases the risk of a rollover, which may result in
severe injury.

Driving Downhill
Before driving down a steep hill, you need to determine
if it is too steep for a safe descent. What is the surface
traction? Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow,
controlled descent? Are there obstacles? Is it a straight
descent? Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill
to regain control if the vehicle descends to fast? If you feel
confident in your ability to proceed, then make sure you
are in 4L (Low) and proceed with caution. Allow engine
braking to control the descent and apply your brakes, if
necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.

WARNING!
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use
vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking.
Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose
control and be seriously injured or killed.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 459

Driving Across An Incline
If at all possible, avoid driving across an incline. If it is
necessary, know your vehicle’s abilities. Driving across
an incline places more weight on the downhill wheels,
which increases the possibilities of a downhill slide or
rollover. Make sure the surface has good traction with
firm and stable soils. If possible, transverse the incline at
an angle heading slightly up or down.

WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of a
rollover , which may result in severe injury.

engine braking to control the descent and apply your
brakes, if necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.

WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never
attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
tipping and rolling the vehicle, which may result in
severe injury. Always back carefully straight down a
hill in REVERSE. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the vehicle brakes. Never drive
diagonally across a hill, always drive straight up or
down.

If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a
steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and
immediately apply the brake. Restart the engine and shift
into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

460 STARTING AND OPERATING

higher than the bottom of the axle differentials, you
should inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water.
ingestion.
Water crossings should be avoided, if possible, and only
be attempted when necessary in a safe, responsible
CAUTION!
manner. You should only drive through areas which are
designated and approved. You should tread lightly and • Water ingestion into the axles, transmission, transavoid damage to the environment. You should know
fer case, engine or vehicle interior can occur if you
your vehicle’s abilities and be able to recover it if
drive too fast or through too deep of water. Water
something goes wrong. You should never stop or shut a
can cause permanent damage to engine, driveline
vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested
or other vehicle components, and your brakes will
water into the engine air intake. If the engine stalls, do
be less effective once wet and/or muddy.
not attempt to restart it. Determine if it has ingested • This vehicle is capable of crossing through water at
water first. The key to any crossing is low and slow. Shift
a depth of 30 inches (76 cm) at speeds no greater
into first gear (manual transmission), or DRIVE (autothan 5 mph (8 km/h). Water ingestion can occur
matic transmission), with the transfer case in the 4L
causing damage to your vehicle.
(Low) position and proceed very slowly with a constant
slow speed {3 to 5 mph (5 to 8 km/h) maximum} and
light throttle. Keep the vehicle moving; do not try to
accelerate through the crossing. After crossing any water
Driving Through Water

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 461

Before You Cross Any Type Of Water

Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or Other
As you approach any type of water, you need to deter- Standing Water
mine if you can cross it safely and responsibly. If neces- Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water areas
sary, get out and walk through the water or probe it with normally contain murky or muddy waters. These water
a stick. You need to be sure of its depth, approach angle, types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it
current and bottom condition. Be careful of murky or difficult to determine an accurate water depth, approach
muddy waters; check for hidden obstacles. Make sure angle, and bottom condition. Murky or muddy water
you will not be intruding on any wildlife, and you can holes are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to
recover the vehicle if necessary. The key to a safe crossing entering. This makes for a faster, cleaner and easier
is the water depth, current and bottom conditions. On vehicle recovery. If you are able to determine you can
soft bottoms, the vehicle will sink in, effectively increas- safely cross, than proceed using the low and slow
ing the water level on the vehicle. Be sure to consider this method.
when determining the depth and the ability to safely
cross.
CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effectiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

462 STARTING AND OPERATING

if there are any obstacles. Then cross at an angle heading
slightly upstream using the low and slow technique.

Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Or
Other Flowing Water
Flowing water can be extremely dangerous. Never attempt to cross a fast running stream or river even in
shallow water. Fast moving water can easily push your
vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of control. Even in
very shallow water, a high current can still wash the dirt
out from around your tires putting you and your vehicle
in jeopardy. There is still a high risk of personal injury
and vehicle damage with slower water currents in depths
greater than the vehicle’s running ground clearance. You
should never attempt to cross flowing water which is
deeper than the vehicle’s running ground clearance. Even
the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle downstream and out of control if the water is deep enough to
push on the large surface area of the vehicle’s body.
Before you proceed, determine the speed of the current,
the water’s depth, approach angle, bottom condition and

WARNING!
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It can
push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of
control. This could put you and your passengers at
risk of injury or drowning.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
can get any problems taken care of right away and have
your vehicle ready when you need it.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 463

• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.

WARNING!

• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.

Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.

• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and • If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
propeller shafts.
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
correct the situation.
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
and cleaned as soon as possible.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

464 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
The standard power steering system will give you good
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
does not in any way damage the steering system.
steering capability if power assist is lost.
POWER STEERING

If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:

CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.

• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 465

Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

466 STARTING AND OPERATING

PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an
automatic transmission in PARK, or manual transmission
in REVERSE or first gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
Parking Brake

When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument
cluster will illuminate.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 467

NOTE:

WARNING!

• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.

• Never use the PARK position on an automatic
transmission as a substitute for the parking brake.
Always apply the parking brake fully when parked
to guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

468 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

CAUTION!

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK, a manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear. Failure to do so may cause the
vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.

If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. There will be some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident
by increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the “Brake Warning Light.”

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 469

In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
OFF) the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the
driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent
wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery
surfaces.

Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes Anti-Lock Brake Sys- All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
tem (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce
System (BAS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Electronic Roll accurate signals for the computer.
Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
WARNING!
Trailer Sway Control (TSC), and Hill Descent Control
(HDC). All of these systems work together to enhance Significant over or under-inflation of tires, or mixing
vehicle stability and control in various driving condi- sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss
tions, and are commonly referred to as ESC.
of braking effectiveness.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

470 STARTING AND OPERATING

The Anti-Lock Brake System conducts a low speed selftest at about 12 mph (20 km/h). If for any reason your
foot is on the brake when the vehicle reaches 12 mph
(20 km/h), this check will be delayed until 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Anti-Lock Brake System pump motor runs during
the self-test, and during an ABS stop, to provide the
regulated hydraulic pressure. The motor pump makes a
low humming noise during operation; this is normal.

WARNING!
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.

WARNING! (Continued)
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can they increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of
the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 471

A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and
The Anti-Lock Brake System is subject to possible controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
detrimental effects of electronic interference caused on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
by improperly installed aftermarket radios or tele- system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
phones.
that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if
NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing sen- TCS and ESC are in either the “Partial Off” or “Full Off”
sation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard. This modes. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in
is normal, indicating that the Anti-Lock Brake System is this section for further information.
functioning.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
Traction Control System (TCS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake system detects an emergency braking situation by senspressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
stability.
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very

CAUTION!

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

472 STARTING AND OPERATING

quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.

WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. The BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.

WARNING!
If the clutch pedal (manual transmission only) remains pressed during the application of the throttle,
the HSA will disengage allowing the vehicle to roll
down the incline. This could cause a collision with
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 473

WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING!

another vehicle or object. To avoid this, do not apply
throttle while pressing the clutch pedal until you are
ready to release the clutch. Always remember the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.

There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer where the system
will not activate and slight rolling may occur, which
could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.

HSA Activation Criteria

The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
The system will only work if the intended direction of the
activate:
vehicle and vehicle gear match. For example, if the
• Vehicle must be stopped
intended direction is forward up a hill and the vehicle is
• Vehicle must be on an 8% (approximately) or greater in DRIVE (automatic transmission equipped vehicle),
incline (approximately 3% for manual transmission and the activation criteria are met, HSA will activate.
equipped vehicles)
HSA On Automatic Transmission Vehicles
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., The system will work in REVERSE, and all forward gears
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back- on vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission.
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in
NEUTRAL.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

474 STARTING AND OPERATING

HSA On Manual Transmission Vehicles
The system will work in REVERSE, forward gears, and
NEUTRAL on manual transmission equipped vehicles.
The system does not recognize NEUTRAL on manual
vehicles, thus it will hold the vehicle on an incline for a
short period while in NEUTRAL, regardless of clutch
position. If the vehicle is pointed down hill in NEUTRAL
and your foot is not on the clutch, it will roll down hill,
HSA will not hold you in this case. To prevent this, do not
attempt to roll down a hill simply by putting the transmission in NEUTRAL and letting gravity act on the
vehicle. Instead, use the appropriate gear for moving in
the desired direction.
NOTE:
Towing With HSA

WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releasing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.

HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
when pulling a trailer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 475

HSA Off

WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.

If you wish to turn off the HSA system, follow this
procedure:
1. Start with the engine off and vehicle in PARK (automatic transmission) or NEUTRAL with clutch out
(manual transmission) with wheels straight. Apply
parking brake on manual transmission vehicle.

NOTE: The HSA system may also be turned on and off 2. Start the engine.
if the vehicle is equipped with the Electronic Vehicle 3. With the engine running, the brake applied, and the
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
clutch out, rotate the steering wheel 180° counterclockInformation Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
wise from center.
Instrument Panel” for further information.
4. Press the ESC OFF switch four times within twenty
seconds.
5. Rotate the steering wheel 360° clockwise (180° clockwise from center).
6. Cycle ignition switch OFF then ON.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

476 STARTING AND OPERATING

7. If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) can only reduce the
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will blink chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive
several times to confirm HSA is off.
driving maneuvers. It cannot prevent wheel lift due to
other factors such as road conditions, leaving the roadSteps 1-7 must be completed within 90 seconds to turn off
way or striking objects or other vehicles.
HSA. Repeat steps 1-7 to re-enable HSA functionality.
NOTE: Anytime the ESC system is in the “Full Off”
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
mode, ERM is disabled. Refer to Electronic Stability
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by Control (ESC) for a complete explanation of the available
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed ESC modes.
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change
of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient
WARNING!
to potentially cause wheel lift, it applies the appropriate
brake and may reduce engine power to lessen the chance Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condithat wheel lift will occur. ERM will only intervene during tions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. Electronic Roll
very severe or evasive driving maneuvers.
Mitigation (ERM) cannot prevent all wheel lift or
rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the
roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 477

WARNING! (Continued)
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC
corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the over/under steer condition. Engine
power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain
the desired path.

the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster), starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual driving to the prevailing road conditions.
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

478 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.

The ESC system has three available operating modes in
4H range. The system has one operating mode in 4L
range. Two-wheel drive vehicles and four-wheel drive
vehicles in 2H range have two operating modes.
4H Range (4WD Models)
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4H range.
ESC Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC
OFF switch. When in #ESC Partial Off# mode, the TCS
portion of ESC (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and the
#ESC Off Indicator Light# will be illuminated.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 479

This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep
snow, sand, or gravel conditions and more wheel spin
than ESC would normally allow is required to gain
traction. To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the
ESC OFF switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On”
mode of operation.

WARNING!
• When in %ESC Partial Off% mode, the TCS functionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature
described in the TCS section), has been disabled
and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in %ESC Partial Off% mode, the engine
power reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and
the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC
system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the %ESC Partial Off% mode.

NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the #ESC Partial
Off# mode by pressing the ESC OFF switch. Once the
situation requiring ESC to be switched to the #ESC Partial
Off# mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the ESC OFF switch. This may be done ESC Full Off
while the vehicle is in motion.
This mode is entered by pressing and holding momentarily pressing the ESC OFF switch for five seconds.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

480 STARTING AND OPERATING

In the #ESC Full Off# mode, the engine torque reduction
and stability features are disabled. Therefore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In
an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. “ESC Full Off”
mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only.

When in #ESC Full Off# mode, ESC and TCS, except for
the Brake Limited Differential (BLD) feature described in
the TCS section, are turned off until the vehicle reaches
an approximate speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). For speeds
at or exceeding approximately 40 mph (64 km/h) the ESC
goes into #ESC Partial Off#. When the vehicle speed drops
below 35 mph (56 km/h), the ESC system goes back to
#ESC Full Off#. To turn ESC on again, momentarily press
the ESC OFF switch. This will restore normal “ESC On”
mode of operation. The #ESC Off Indicator Light” will
always be illuminated when ESC is in #ESC Partial Off#
and #ESC full Off#.

WARNING!
With the ESC in %ESC Full Off% mode, the engine
torque reduction and stability features offered by
ESC and ERM are disabled. In an emergency evasive
ESC OFF Switch

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 481

WARNING! (Continued)
maneuver, the ESC and ERM systems will not engage
to assist in maintaining stability. The %ESC Full Off%
mode is intended for off-road use only.
4L Range (4WD Models)
ESC Full Off
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4L range.
Whenever the vehicle is started in 4L range, or the
transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from 4H range or
NEUTRAL to 4L range, the ESC system will be in this
mode. In 4L range, ESC and TCS, except for the Brake
Limited Differential (BLD) feature described in the TCS
section, are turned off until the vehicle reaches an approximate speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). For speeds at or
exceeding approximately 40 mph (64 km/h) the ESC goes
into #ESC Partial Off# When the vehicle speed drops
below 35 mph (56 km/h), the ESC system goes back to

#ESC Full Off#. The ESC is in #ESC Full Off# at low vehicle
speeds in 4L range so that it will not interfere with
off-road driving, but the ESC function returns to provide
the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h).
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will always be illuminated in 4L range when ESC is in #ESC Full Off# or #ESC
Partial Off#.
NOTE: The “ESC OFF” message will display and an
audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed in
the PARK position from any position other than PARK,
and then moved out of the PARK position. This will
occur even if the message was previously cleared.

WARNING!
With the ESC in %ESC Full Off% mode, the engine
torque reduction and stability features offered by
ESC and ERM are disabled. In an emergency evasive

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

482 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)
maneuver, the ESC and ERM systems will not engage
to assist in maintaining stability. The %ESC Full Off%
mode is intended for off-road use only.
2H Range (4WD Models) Or 2WD Models

NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 2H range gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the #ESC Partial
and on 2WD vehicles.
Off# mode by pressing the #ESC Full Off# switch. Once the
situation requiring ESC to be switched to the #ESC Partial
ESC Partial Off
Off# mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momenWhen in #ESC Partial Off# mode, the TCS portion of ESC tarily pressing the #ESC Full Off# switch. This may be
(except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS done while the vehicle is in motion.
section), has been disabled and the #ESC Off Indicator
The ESC will restore to normal ESC On mode after each
Light# will be illuminated.
key on.
ESC On

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 483

WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated.
When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the %Partial Off% mode.

RUN position. It should go out with the engine running.
If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle
has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
ESC OFF Indicator Light
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on driving to the prevailing road conditions.
when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON/
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

484 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:

Trailer Sway Control (TSC)

• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position.

TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may
reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC
will become active automatically once an excessively
swaying trailer is recognized. TSC cannot stop all trailers
from swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer
and follow the tongue weight recommendations. Refer to
“Trailer Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the
engine power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to
stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the
ESC system is in the #ESC Partial Off# or #ESC Full Off#
modes.

• Each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
position, the ESC system will be ON even if it was
cycled off previously, except for when the vehicle is
started while in 4L Range.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
off or full off.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 485

WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.

When enabled, HDC senses the terrain and activates
when the vehicle is descending a hill. HDC speed may be
adjusted by the driver to suit the driving conditions. The
speed corresponds to the transmission gear selected.
Gear

Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is only intended for low speed off-road driving.
HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills in
off-road driving conditions by applying the brakes when
necessary.
The symbol indicates the status of the Hill
Descent Control (HDC) feature. The lamp will
be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only
be armed when the transfer case is in the “4WD
LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph
(48 km/h). If these conditions are not met while attempting to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will
flash on/off.

1st
2nd
3rd
4th
DRIVE
REVERSE

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Approximate HDC Set
Speed
1 mph (1.5 km/h)
2.5 mph (4 km/h)
4 mph (6.5 km/h)
5.5 mph (9 km/h)
7.5 mph (12 km/h)
1 mph (1.5 km/h)

486 STARTING AND OPERATING

However, the driver can override HDC operation by NOTE:
applying the brake to slow the vehicle down below the
• If the transfer case is not in 4WD LOW range, the
HDC control speed. If more speed is desired during HDC
“Hill Descent Control Indicator Light” will flash for
control, the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed
five seconds and HDC will not be enabled.
in the usual manner. When either the brake or the
• If the ESC senses that the brakes are overheating the
accelerator is released, HDC will control the vehicle at the
“Hill Descent Control Indicator Light” will flash for
original set speed.
five seconds and HDC will become deactivated until
Enabling HDC
the brakes have cooled.
1. Shift the transfer case into 4WD LOW range. Refer to Disabling HDC
“Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and OperPress the “Hill Descent” button or shift the transfer case
ating” for further information.
out of 4WD LOW range. The “Hill Descent Control
2. Press the “Hill Descent” button. The “Hill Descent Indicator” light in the instrument cluster will turn off.
Control Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will
turn on solid.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 487

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

NOTE:

Tire Markings

• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter #P# is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description

• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

488 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure comstandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
%....blank....% = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 489

EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
– #R# means radial construction, or
– #D# means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

490 STARTING AND OPERATING

EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 491

EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

492 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Maximum Inflation Pressure

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard

Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 493

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.

5
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

494 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire And Loading Information Placard

Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 495

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
spare tires.
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
Loading
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the weight referenced here.
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuinflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
of this manual.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pasGAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

496 STARTING AND OPERATING

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followbe five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
650 lbs [295 kg]).
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
• For the following example, the combined weight of
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
capacity calculated in step 4.
(392 kg).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 497

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

498 STARTING AND OPERATING

Safety

WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability

WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.

• Economy

(Continued)

• Tread Wear

• Ride Comfort

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 499

Economy

WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.

Under-inflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear

Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability need for earlier tire replacement.
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
NOTE:
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause ride.
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

500 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.

• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under- Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
inflated.
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. temperature changes.

CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 501

inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
Radial Ply Tires
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
WARNING!
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alequipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
combine them with other types of tires.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

502 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Repair

Tire Types

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it All Season Tires — If Equipped
meets the following criteria:
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary be• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
• The puncture is no greater than ¼# (6 mm).
handling of your vehicle.
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).

Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold
driving conditions. Install winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 503

Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.

WARNING!
Do not use summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

504 STARTING AND OPERATING

While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.

See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.

CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.

It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 505

Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.

T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.

WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

506 STARTING AND OPERATING

Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped

WARNING! (Continued)
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.

The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.

WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 507

WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING!

inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

Tire Spinning

Tread Wear Indicators

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or to help you in determining when your tires should be
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop- replaced.
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

508 STARTING AND OPERATING

wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to
“Replacement Tires” in this section for further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style

1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire

• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle mainbecomes 1/16” (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 509

WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.

Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
Replacement Tires
those of the original wheels.
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator.” Refer to the Tire and Loading

It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

510 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.

• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 511

• Install on Rear Tires Only.

• P225/75R16 or a P235/65R17 tire with the use of a
traction device that meets the SAE type “Class S”
specification is recommended.

WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.

CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

512 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.

The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling, The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at shown in the following diagram.
unequal rates.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 513

CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference
on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause
damage to the transfer case. Tire rotation schedule
should be followed to balance tire wear.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)

Tire Rotation

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7.0 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

514 STARTING AND OPERATING

three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three-hour period. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on
how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven; this is
normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.

must be increased to the recommended cold placard
pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” to be turned OFF.

NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if The system will automatically update and the “Tire
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish once
threshold for any reason, including low temperature the updated tire pressures have been received. The
effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) air pressure of 35
cold placard pressure. Once the “Tire Pressure Monitor- psi (241 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
ing Telltale Light” has been illuminated, the tire pressure and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi (207 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 515

pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 30
psi (207 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF only
after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.

CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. The TPMS pressures
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or
style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to your local dealership to have your sensor
function checked.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

516 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION! (Continued)
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.

• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.

• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
NOTE:
reached the level to trigger illumination of the “Tire
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.”
and maintenance, nor to provide warning of a tire
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
failure or condition.
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
the tire.
while adjusting your tire pressure.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 517

Base TPM System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
following components:
• Receiver Module

• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors

• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare
wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size

spare wheel and tire assembly. The matching full size
spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road
tires. A low spare tire will not cause the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” to illuminate or the chime to
sound while stowed in the spare location.
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “LOW TIRE
PRESSURE” message will display in the EVIC, and an
audible chime will be activated when one or more of the
four active road tire pressures are low. Should this occur,
you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value. The system will automatically update and the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish
once the updated tire pressures have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

518 STARTING AND OPERATING

The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds, and will remain on solid when
a system fault is detected. The system fault will also
sound a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence
will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault
can occur by any of the following scenarios:

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
Vehicles not equipped with EVIC will inform the driver
which tire(s) are low but not provide actual tire pressure.
The low tire ISO telltale will illuminate along with
“LoTIrE” message displayed in the ODO and then it will
scroll to which tire location is lower than the Placard
Value.

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the Tire location will be displayed as follows:
TPM sensors.
LF = Left Front
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting rF = right Front
that affects radio wave signals.
Lr = Left rear
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
rr = right rear
housings.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 519

NOTE:
• If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a tire pressure
monitoring sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). In the event that
the matching full-size spare tire is swapped with a low
pressure road tire, the next ignition key cycle will still
show the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to
be ON, and a chime to sound. Driving the vehicle for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) will turn
OFF the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” as
long as none of the road tires are below the low
pressure warning threshold.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching
full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it does not
have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire.
The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure.
If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that

has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound
and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
turn ON. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. For each subsequent ignition
key cycle, a chime will sound and the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. Once you repair or
replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the
vehicle in place of the spare tire, the TPMS will update
automatically and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the
four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

520 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to the proper pressure.
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure following components:
readings to the Receiver Module.
• Receiver Module
Premium System — If Equipped

• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors

• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC), and a graphic displaying tire pressures
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

Tire Pressure Monitor Display

A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare
wheel, if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
spare wheel and tire assembly. The matching full-size
spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road
tires.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 521

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be activated, when one or more of the
four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the
EVIC will display a “LOW TIRE” message for a minimum of five seconds. An “Inflate to XX” message and a
graphic display of the pressure value(s) with the low
tire(s) “flashing” will also be displayed. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

5
Tire Pressure Monitor Display

NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is “flashing” on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
inflation value shown in the “Inflate to XX” message. The
system will automatically update, the graphic display of
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

522 STARTING AND OPERATING

the pressure value(s) will stop “flashing,” and the Tire If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
the updated tire pressure(s) have been received.
Light” will no longer flash, the #SERVICE TPM SYSTEM#
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
any of the following:
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes 1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
TPM sensors.
SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
that affects radio wave signals.
on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound 3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
a chime. The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYShousings.
TEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
message is then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“
in place of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 523

The EVIC will also display a #SERVICE TPM SYSTEM# NOTE:
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
• If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
fault is detected possibly related to an incorrect sensor
spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a tire pressure
location fault. In this case, the #SERVICE TPM SYSTEM#
monitoring sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire
message is then followed by a graphic display, with
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). In the event that
pressure values still shown. This indicates the pressure
the matching full-size spare tire is swapped with a low
values are still being received from the TPM Sensors but
pressure road tire, the next ignition switch cycle will
they may not be located in the correct vehicle position.
still show the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
However, the system still needs to be serviced as long as
to be ON, a chime to sound, a “LOW TIRE” message to
the #SERVICE TPM SYSTEM# message exists.
appear in the EVIC, and the graphic display will still
show the #Inflate to XX# message and the low tire
pressure value “flashing.” Driving the vehicle for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) will turn OFF the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” as long as
none of road tires are below the low pressure warning
threshold.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

524 STARTING AND OPERATING

• If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching
full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it does not
have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire.
The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure.
If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that
has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain ON, a chime
will sound, and the EVIC will still display the #Inflate
to XX# message and a “flashing” pressure value in the
graphic display. After driving the vehicle for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the
EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM# message for a minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. For each
subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound,
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash

on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid,
and the EVIC will display a #SERVICE TPM SYSTEM#
message for a minimum of five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
• Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the
TPMS will update automatically.
In addition, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 525

General Information

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and 3.6L Engine
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:

This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when us• This device must accept any interference received,
ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoincluding interference that may cause undesired opline having an octane rating of 87. The use
eration.
of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these enfollowing licenses:
gines.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.

United States
Canada

MRXC4W4MA4
2546A-C4W4MA4

Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

526 STARTING AND OPERATING

Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World- Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxywide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties genates such as Ethanol.
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recomCAUTION!
mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
Reformulated Gasoline
blends may result in starting and drivability probMany areas of the country require the use of cleaner lems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.” emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are spe- cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illumicifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im- nate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
prove air quality.
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoProblems that result from using gasoline containing
line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will proMethanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
fuel system components.
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 527

E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles

• Change the engine oil and oil filter.

Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso- • Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
line containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher
engine controller memory.
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
Warranty.
exposure to E-85 fuel.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
MMT In Gasoline
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
• Operate in a lean mode.
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
• Poor engine performance.
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
E-85 perform the following:
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
• Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

528 STARTING AND OPERATING

therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 529

NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

530 STARTING AND OPERATING

ADDING FUEL

CAUTION!

Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement
cap is the correct one for this vehicle.

• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting
aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.

WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
Fuel Filler Cap

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 531

WARNING! (Continued)
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.

• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose,
improperly installed, or damaged. If the system detects a
malfunction, the “gASCAP” message will display in the
odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a #clicking#
NOTE:
sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank properly tightened. Press the odometer reset button to
turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message
is full.
will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This
• Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you hear one might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected
click. This is an indication that the cap is properly twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving
tightened.
the problem will turn the MIL off.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

532 STARTING AND OPERATING

VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label

rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.

Payload
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle components sometimes specified by purchasers for inincluding driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehiThe label also specifies maximum capacities of front and cle’s GVWR.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 533

determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial
scale before any occupants or cargo are added.

Tire Size

The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires Loading
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
listed.

Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are

The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the
front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

534 STARTING AND OPERATING

Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
the brakes operate.
Common Towing Definitions

CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.

The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
TRAILER TOWING
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
In this section you will find safety tips and information further information.
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temand safely as possible.
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its #loaded and
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 535

ready for operation# condition. The recommended way to
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)

WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.

The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
Tongue Weight (TW)
and trailer when weighed in combination.

The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. The recommended tongue weight
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
is 10% to 15% for a conventional hitch. You must consider
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
this as part of the load on your vehicle.
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica- Frontal Area
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
information.
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

536 STARTING AND OPERATING

Trailer Sway Control – If Equipped
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer
tongue. It typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the

tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.

WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 537

WARNING! (Continued)
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.

Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
on your vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

538 STARTING AND OPERATING

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/
Transmission

Axle

Model

3.6L/Manual

3.21

3.6L/Manual

3.73

3.6L/
Automatic

3.21

Two–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
Two–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
Two–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)

GCWR
(Gross
Combined
Wt. Rating)
6,311 lbs
(2 863 kg)

Frontal Area

Max. GTW
(Gross
Trailer Wt.)

Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)

25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)

2,000 lbs
(907 kg)

200 lbs
(91 kg)

6,311 lbs
(2 863 kg)

25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)

2,000 lbs
(907 kg)

200 lbs
(91 kg)

6,340 lbs
(2 876 kg)

25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)

2,000 lbs
(907 kg)

200 lbs
(91 kg)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 539

Engine/
Transmission

Axle

Model

3.6L/
Automatic

3.73

3.6L/Manual

3.21

Two–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
Two–Door
Sahara
Model
(4WD)
Two–Door
Sahara
Model
(4WD)

3.6L/Manual

3.73

GCWR
(Gross
Combined
Wt. Rating)
6,340 lbs
(2 876 kg)

Frontal Area

Max. GTW
(Gross
Trailer Wt.)

Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)

25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)

2,000 lbs
(907 kg)

200 lbs
(91 kg)

6,353 lbs
(2 882 kg)

25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)

2,000 lbs
(907 kg)

200 lbs
(91 kg)

6,353 lbs
(2 882 kg)

25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)

2,000 lbs
(907 kg)

200 lbs
(91 kg)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

540 STARTING AND OPERATING

Engine/
Transmission

Axle

Model

3.6L/
Automatic

3.21

3.6L/
Automatic

3.73

3.6L/Manual

4.10

Two–Door
Sahara
Model
(4WD)
Two–Door
Sahara
Model
(4WD)
2–Door Rubicon Model
(4WD)

GCWR
(Gross
Combined
Wt. Rating)
6,383 lbs
(2 895 kg)

Frontal Area

Max. GTW
(Gross
Trailer Wt.)

Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)

25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)

2,000 lbs
(907 kg)

200 lbs
(91 kg)

6,383 lbs
(2 895 kg)

25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)

2,000 lbs
(907 kg)

200 lbs
(91 kg)

6,443 lbs
(2 922 kg)

25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)

2,000 lbs
(907 kg)

200 lbs
(91 kg)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 541

Engine/
Transmission

Axle

Model

3.6L/
Automatic

3.73

3.6L/
Automatic

4.10

3.6L/Manual

3.21

3.6L/Manual

3.73

Two–Door
Rubicon
Model
(4WD)
Two–Door
Rubicon
Model
(4WD)
Four–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
Four–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)

GCWR
(Gross
Combined
Wt. Rating)
6,473 lbs
(2 936 kg)

Frontal Area

Max. GTW
(Gross
Trailer Wt.)

Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)

25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)

2,000 lbs
(907 kg)

200 lbs
(91 kg)

6,473 lbs
(2 936 kg)

25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)

2,000 lbs
(907 kg)

200 lbs
(91 kg)

6,751 lbs
(3 062 kg)

32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)

2,000 lbs
(907 kg)

200 lbs
(91 kg)

8,251 lbs
(3 743kg)

32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)

3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)

350 lbs
(159 kg)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

542 STARTING AND OPERATING

Engine/
Transmission

Axle

Model

3.6L/
Automatic

3.21

3.6L/
Automatic

3.73

3.6L/Manual

3.21

3.6L/Manual

3.73

Four–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
Four–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
Four–Door
Sahara
Model
(4WD)
Four–Door
Sahara
Model
(4WD)

GCWR
(Gross
Combined
Wt. Rating)
6,780 lbs
(3 075 kg)

Frontal Area

Max. GTW
(Gross
Trailer Wt.)

Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)

32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)

2,000 lbs
(907 kg)

200 lbs
(91 kg)

8,280 lbs
(3 756 kg)

32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)

3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)

350 lbs
(159 kg)

6,698 lbs
(3 038 kg)

32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)

2,000 lbs
(907 kg)

200 lbs
(91 kg)

8,198 lbs
(3 719 kg)

32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)

3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)

350 lbs
(159 kg)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 543

Engine/
Transmission

Axle

Model

3.6L/
Automatic

3.21

3.6L/
Automatic

3.73

3.6L/Manual

4.10

Four–Door
Sahara
Model
(4WD)
Four–Door
Sahara
Model
(4WD)
Four–Door
Rubicon
Model
(4WD)

GCWR
(Gross
Combined
Wt. Rating)
6,728 lbs
(3 052 kg)

Frontal Area

Max. GTW
(Gross
Trailer Wt.)

Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)

32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)

2,000 lbs
(907 kg)

200 lbs
(91 kg)

8,228 lbs
(3 732 kg)

32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)

3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)

350 lbs
(159 kg)

8,326 lbs
(3 776 kg)

32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)

3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)

350 lbs
(159 kg)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

544 STARTING AND OPERATING

Engine/
Transmission

Axle

3.6L/
Automatic

3.73

3.6L/
Automatic

4.10

Model

GCWR
(Gross
Combined
Wt. Rating)
8,355 lbs
(3 790 kg)

Frontal Area

Max. GTW
(Gross
Trailer Wt.)

Four–Door
32 sq ft
3,500 lbs
Rubicon
(2.97 sq m)
(1 587 kg)
Model
(4WD)
8,355 lbs
32 sq ft
3,500 lbs
Four–Door
Rubicon
(3 776 kg)
(2.97 sq m)
(1 587 kg)
Model
(4WD)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
350 lbs
(159 kg)

350 lbs
(159 kg)

STARTING AND OPERATING 545

NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo (ie.
the GVWR), and the GVWR should never exceed the
weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information
placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Starting
and Operating” for further information.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side Consider the following items when computing the
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer. weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of • The tongue weight of the trailer.
many trailer collisions.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
put in or on your vehicle.
your bumper or trailer hitch.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

546 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recommended:

CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.

NOTE: Trailer towing requires special rear axle lubricant. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for the correct fluid type.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 547

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to the brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.

• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. With a manual transmission, shift the transmission into first gear. And
with four-wheel-drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL (N). Always,
block or %chock% the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

548 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.

• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper
inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.

Towing Requirements — Tires

Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and OperThis could cause inadequate braking and possible
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
personal injury.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 549

• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).

WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.

WARNING! (Continued)
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.

CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

550 STARTING AND OPERATING

Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package will include a four–pin wiring
harness. Use a factory-approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustration.
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Four-Pin Connector
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn

STARTING AND OPERATING 551

NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve perforBefore setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
mance and extend transmission life by reducing excesand backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
sive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also
traffic.
provide better engine braking.
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45
all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch
minutes of continuous operation, then change the transslippage.
mission fluid and filter as specified for #police, taxi, fleet,
or frequent trailer towing.# Refer to the “Maintenance
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent before towing.
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the
AutoStick — If Equipped
AutoStick® shift control to manually select a lower gear.
• When using the AutoStick shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “4” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or
“2” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
Towing Tips

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

552 STARTING AND OPERATING

• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to
a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.

Cooling System

Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped

When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.

• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.

To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving

Highway Driving
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until Reduce speed.
you can get back to cruising speed.
Air Conditioning
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
Turn off temporarily.
maximize fuel efficiency.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 553

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Flat Tow

Wheels OFF the Ground
NONE
•
•

Dolly Tow
On Trailer

Front
Rear
ALL

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

•
•

Four-Wheel Drive Models
See Instructions
Automatic transmission in PARK
Manual transmission in gear
(NOT in NEUTRAL [N])
Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK

554 STARTING AND OPERATING

Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Models
NOTE: The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL
(N), automatic transmission must be shifted into PARK,
and manual transmission must be placed in gear (NOT in
NEUTRAL) for recreational towing.

CAUTION!
• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with
only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear)
will cause severe transmission and/or transfer case
damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the
ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the
transfer case.
• Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARK
for recreational towing.

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Manual transmissions must be placed in gear (not
in Neutral) for recreational towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)” to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL
(N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 555

Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.

WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear drive
shaft from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle
to roll, even if the automatic transmission is in PARK
(or manual transmission is in gear). The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.

CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or
depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
4. Turn the engine OFF.
5. Shift the transfer case lever into NEUTRAL (N).
6. Start the engine.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

556 STARTING AND OPERATING

8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual 13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
transmissions) for five seconds and ensure that there is
tow bar.
no vehicle movement.
14. Release the parking brake.
9. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 with automatic transmission in
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL (N)
DRIVE or manual transmission in first gear.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
10. Turn the engine OFF.
normal usage.
11. Firmly apply the parking brake.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
12. Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual
transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL).
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.

CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
NEUTRAL (N) and the engine running. With the
transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) ensure that the engine
is OFF before shifting the transmission into PARK.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
5. Press and hold the brake pedal.
6. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 557

7. Shift the transfer case lever to the desired position.

11. Start the engine.

NOTE: When shifting the transfer case out of NEUTRAL 12. Press and hold the brake pedal.
(N), the engine should remain OFF to avoid gear clash.
13. Release the parking brake.
8. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK, or place
14. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake
manual transmission in NEUTRAL.
pedal (and clutch pedal on manual transmissions),
9. Release the brake pedal.
and check that the vehicle operates normally.
10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
! HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .560

▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569

! IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .560 ! JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .570
! WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
! JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .563
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566

▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
! FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
! EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED . . .575
! SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
! TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .577
▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
▫ Four–Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

560 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
instrument panel below the climate controls.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • On the highways — slow down.
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming • In city traffic — while stopped, shift transmission into
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.

CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT
(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
service.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 561

NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
an impending overheat condition:
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum properly calibrated torque wrench.
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control Torque Specifications
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
from the engine cooling system.

WARNING!

100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m)

You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
1/2” x 20

Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
19 mm

**Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and
clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

562 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Wheel Mounting Surface

Torque Patterns

Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 563

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.

• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

564 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Jack Location
The jack and lug wrench are located in the rear storage
compartment.

Jack Wing Nut

Jack Storage

NOTE: Turn the black plastic wing nut counterclockwise
to loosen the jack from the storage bin.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 565

2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

Spare Tire Removal

To remove the spare tire from the carrier, remove the tire 3. Set the parking brake.
cover, if equipped, and remove the lug nuts with the lug
4. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK, or a
wrench turning them counterclockwise.
manual transmission into REVERSE.
NOTE: If you have added aftermarket accessories to the
spare tire mounted carrier, it cannot exceed a gross 5. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
weight of 85 lbs (38.5 kg) including the weight of the 6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
spare tire.
opposite of the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right front
Preparations For Jacking
tire, block the left rear wheel.
1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery areas.

WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.

NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

566 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Jacking Instructions

WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.

• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 567

3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools. Connect the jack
handle driver to the extension, then to the lug wrench.
4. Operate the jack from the front or the rear of the
vehicle. Place the jack under the axle tube, as shown.
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
fully engaged.

Jack Warning Label

CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.

1. Remove the spare tire, jack and tools from the stored
location.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is
still on the ground.
Rear Jacking Location
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

568 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable and cause a collision. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts clockwise.
Front Jacking Location

5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the
surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the
spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.

WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 569

8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left, Road Tire Installation
and remove the jack.
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alterend of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
nate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice.
lug nuts.
Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for
correct lug nut torque.

WARNING!

10. Remove the jack assembly and wheel blocks.
11. Secure the tire, jack, and tools in their proper locations.

WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop, could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

570 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

each nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
nut torque refer to “Torque Specifications” in this follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
section. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have precautions.
them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.
CAUTION!
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.

Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.

WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 571

Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the right rear of
the engine compartment, behind the Power Distribution
Center.

Positive Battery Post

WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK (manual transmission in NEUTRAL) and
turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

572 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure

CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.

3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 573

WARNING!

2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.

3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.

5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
you should have the battery and charging system instart the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
spected at your authorized dealer.
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

574 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION! (Continued)

CAUTION!

the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.

Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of clutch or transmission failure during
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or 2nd gear
and REVERSE (with manual transmission), while gently
pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking
motion, without spinning the wheels, or racing the
engine.

NOTE: Press the #ESC Off# switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in #Partial Off# mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the #ESC
Off# switch again to restore #ESC On# mode.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 575

CAUTION!

WARNING! (Continued)

• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).

explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could

EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, they are
mounted in the front and the rear.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle. Always use an appropriately rated
tow strap.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

576 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE

WARNING!
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious injury.

CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle. Tow straps are recommended
when towing the vehicle, chains may cause vehicle
damage.

If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
shift lever override access cover (located to the right of
the shift lever).
4. Turn the ignition to the ACC or ON/RUN position,
but do not start the engine.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 577

7. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
8. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
9. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles
may also be towed as described under “Recreational
Towing” in the “Starting And Operating” section.
Shift Lever Override Access Cover

5. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
6. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access
port, and push and hold the override release lever
down.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

578 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Towing Condition
Flat Tow

Wheels OFF the Ground
NONE

Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow

Front
Rear
ALL

Flatbed

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.

4WD MODELS
See instructions under “Recreational Towing”
• Automatic Transmission in PARK
• Manual Transmission in gear ( NOT in Neutral)
• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL
• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
BEST METHOD

If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to “Shift Lever
Override” in this section for instructions on shifting the
automatic transmission out of PARK for towing.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 579

Four–Wheel Drive Models

CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.

The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised
and the opposite end on a towing dolly.

If flatbed equipment is not available and the transfer case
is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in the forward
direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), IF the
transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission is
Without The Ignition Key
in PARK (for automatic transmissions) or in gear ( NOT
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
in NEUTRAL, for manual transmissions). Refer to “Recwith the ignition in the LOCK position. The only apreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for deproved method of towing without the ignition key is
tailed instructions.
with a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

580 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
! ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .583

▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591

! ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .584

▫ Accessory Drive Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . . .595

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .584

▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596

! EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585

▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .598

! REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
! DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
! MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .587
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591

▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

582 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .619

▫ Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642

▫ Clutch Hydraulic System (Manual Transmission)
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623

▫ Front Park/Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643

▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . .623
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
! FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633

▫ Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
▫ Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . . .645
! FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646

▫ Totally Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . .634

! FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647

! VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640

▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647

! REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641

▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649

! BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 583

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L

7
1
2
3
4
5
6

— Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
— Battery
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Automatic Transmission Dipstick (Under Engine Cover)
— Engine Oil Fill
— Brake Fluid Reservoir

7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
8 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
9 — Air Cleaner Filter
10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
11 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

584 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.

CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose, improperly installed, or damaged. A “gASCAP” message will be
displayed in the odometer. Tighten the gas cap until a
#clicking# sound is heard. This is an indication that the
gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer reset
button to turn the message off. If the problem persists,

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 585

the message will appear the next time the vehicle is serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacestarted. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the prob- ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
lem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
PROGRAMS
following:
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte- NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction start this test over.
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
system is ready for testing.
of a normal bulb check.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

586 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen:
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
running.
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.

Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainteIf your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was Limited Warranty.
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, DEALER SERVICE
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personsystem to update. A recheck with the above test routine nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 587

available which include detailed service information for MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
attempting any procedure yourself.
services determined by the engineers who designed your
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control vehicle.
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
penalties being assessed against you.
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.

WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

588 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Engine Oil

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.

Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. The
engine oil level should be checked five minutes after a
warmed up engine has been shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the
dipstick. Adding 1 U.S. Quart (0.95L) of oil when the
reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a
reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines.

CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 589

Change Engine Oil

American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is Identification Symbol
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
This symbol means that the oil has
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informabeen certified by the American
tion.
Petroleum Institute (API). The
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inmanufacturer only recommends
tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve
API Certified engine oils.
months, whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.

CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

590 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine

Synthetic Engine Oils

MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to Chrysler
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, Shell
Helix® or equivalent is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.

You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.

The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.

Materials Added To Engine Oil

NOTE: MOPAR® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®,
Shell Helix® or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20 Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where
used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 591

Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter

WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
maintenance intervals.
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

592 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement — Gasoline Engine
Follow the recommended maintenance intervals as
shown in the Maintenance Schedule.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Remove the bolts from the air cleaner intake tube.

Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Spring Clips
2
3
4
5
6

— Air Hose
— Clean Air Hose Clamp
— Clean Air Intake Tube Bolts
— Air Cleaner Filter Cover
— Clean Air Intake Tube

2. Remove air hose and loosen clean air hose clamp then
release the spring clips on the air intake cover.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 593

Air Cleaner Filter Cover

Air Cleaner Air Hose

1 — Spring Clips
2 — Air Hose
3 — Clean Air Hose Clamp

3. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter.

1
2
3
4
5

— Air Filter Cleaner Cover
— Air Hose
— Clean Air Intake Tube
— Clean Air Hose Clamp
— Air Cleaner Filter

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

594 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

4. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
assembly.
NOTE: Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the air filter element.
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing
assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface
facing downward.
2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing assembly
locating tabs.
3. Latch the spring clips and lock the air cleaner cover to
the housing assembly and install air hose.
Air Cleaner Filter

4. Tighten air intake clamp and tighten air cleaner intake
tube bolts.

1 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 595

Accessory Drive Belt Inspection

WARNING!
• Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition switch position. You could be injured by
the moving fan blades.
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.

When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)

596 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Conditions that would require replacement:

Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component
such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
• Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt
inspected for damage and proper alignment.
body)
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
• Rib or belt wear
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle ser• Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs) viced at an authorized dealer.
• Belt slips

Maintenance-Free Battery

• “Groove jumping# (belt does not maintain correct Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainposition on pulley)
tenance required.
• Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before
new belt is installed)
• Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 597

WARNING!

CAUTION!

• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.

• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Air Conditioner Maintenance

WARNING! (Continued)

For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.

• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.

WARNING!

CAUTION!

• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.

Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
Equipped

the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How- PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (A/C Air Filter)
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf
— If Equipped

WARNING!

Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.

The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to reHFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydroplace the filter:
fluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product 1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However,
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and
lower the door.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Glove Compartment

Air Filter Retaining Tabs

1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops

1 — Left Retaining Tab
2 — Right Retaining Tab

2 — Glove Compartment

5. Open the two air filter access doors.

3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the two
air filter access doors to the HVAC housing.

6. Remove the two particulate air filters from the HVAC
air inlet housing. Pull the filter elements straight out of
the housing, one at a time.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601

CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
8. Close A/C Air Filter access doors and secure retaining
tabs.
9. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position.
Air Filter Access Door Open

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Body Lubrication

1 — Air Conditioning Filter Access Door
2 — Air Conditioning Air Filter

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
7. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perforyear, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Windshield Wiper Blades
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a are experienced. This inspection should include the folmild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula- lowing points:
tions of salt or road film.
• Wear Or Uneven Edges
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603

• Foreign Material

• Hardening Or Cracking

• Deformation Or Fatigue

If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation

CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against
the glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass
may be damaged.

Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
1 — Wiper Blade

1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the 2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
press the release tab on the wiper blade and while
holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper
blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.

Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab

3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605

Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm
is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the
wiper arm.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the
opening in the wiper blade.

Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab

4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper
arm, latch engagement will be accompanied by an
audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Remove the rear wiper arm pivot cap To access the
wiper arm nut.

4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Wiper Assembly

Wiper Arm With Pivot Cap Removed

1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Blade

2. Remove the wiper arm nut and gently rock the wiper
arm while pulling towards you to remove wiper arm
from the stud.

1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm Nut
3 — Wiper Arm

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607

3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, grasp
the wiper blade nearest to wiper arm with your right
hand. With your left hand hold the wiper arm as you
pull the wiper blade away from the wiper arm past its
stop far enough to unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin
from the receptacle on the end of the wiper arm.
NOTE: Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
snap.

Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Wiper Blade

4. Still grasping the wiper blade, move the wiper blade
away from the wiper arm to disengage.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

608 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on
the end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of the
wiper arm with one hand, and press the wiper blade
flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
2. Install wiper assembly back on the wiper stud at it’s
original position and gently tighten nut.
3. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the
wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1
2
3
4

—
—
—
—

Wiper Blade
Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
Wiper Arm Receptacle
Wiper Arm

Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer (if equipped) is shared. The fluid
reservoir is located in the engine compartment. Be sure to
check the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir
with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 609

some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and Exhaust System
wipe clean the wiper blades; this will help blade perfor- The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
mance.
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system system.
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
rating information can be found on most washer fluid or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
containers.
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-

WARNING!
Commercial windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be
exercised when filling or working around the washer
solution.

haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

CAUTION!

• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.

• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 611

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is imvehicle.
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure • Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
damage.
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed Cooling System
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:

WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, when
the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antiCheck the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti- Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser (if
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
equipped) or radiator for any accumulation of bugs,
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
garden hose vertically down the face of the A/C conneeded to be added to the system please contact your
denser (if equipped) or the back of the radiator core.
local authorized dealer.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS-12106).
entire system for leaks.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
maintenance intervals.
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
Engine Coolant Checks

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613

Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh

CAUTION! (Continued)
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Adding Coolant

• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.

Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc- • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deioning this extended maintenance period, it is important that
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
ing to MS-12106) throughout the life of your vehicle.
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainthat meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan- tain the proper level of protection against freezing acdard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615

NOTE:
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.

Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant

Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
spills immediately.
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Engine Coolant Level

Points To Remember

The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine idling, and warm to normal operating temperature, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the
bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the
bottle.

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 617

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in

the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti- • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
expansion bottle must also be protected against freezONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
ing.
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
sions.
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.

Brake System

• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration
at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS-12106) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.

In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Power Disc Brakes
Disc brakes do not require adjustment; however, several
hard stops during the break-in period are recommended
to seat the linings and wear off any foreign material.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinders should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced. If necessary, add fluid
to bring level to the full level mark on the side of the
reservoir of the brake master cylinder. With disc brakes,

fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
If the brake fluid level is abnormally low, check system
for leaks.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619

WARNING! (Continued)

• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.

• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

620 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addiused.
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
CAUTION!
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac- adversely affect seals.
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
CAUTION!
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and
the chemicals can damage your transmission compoGenuine Parts” in this section for fluid specificanents. Such damage is not covered by the New
tions.
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using Fluid Level Check
any special additives in the transmission.

It is best to check the fluid level when the transmission
is at normal operating temperature (approximately
180° F/82° C). This occurs after at least 15 miles (25 km)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 621

of driving. At normal operating temperature, the fluid 6. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips.
seated.
Use the following procedure to check the transmission 7. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
fluid level properly:
both sides. The fluid level reading is only valid if there
is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick.
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
Note that the holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid
2. Remove the engine cover by pulling it up off the
if the actual level is at or above the hole. The fluid level
mounting studs (two in the front and two in the rear).
should be between the HOT (upper) reference holes on
the dipstick at normal operating temperature. If the
3. Run the engine at idle speed and normal operating
fluid level is low, add fluid through the dipstick tube
temperature.
to bring it to the proper level. Do not overfill. Use
4. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake
ONLY the specified fluid (refer to #Fluids, Lubricants,
and Genuine Parts# for fluid specifications). After
pedal.
adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube,
5. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posiwait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully
tion (allowing time for the transmission to fully endrain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid
gage in each position), ending with the transmission in
level.
PARK.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

622 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:
• The holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid if the
actual level is at or above the hole.
• If it is necessary to check the transmission below the
operating temperature, the fluid level should be
between the two COLD (lower) holes on the dipstick
with the fluid at approximately 80° F (27° C). If the
fluid level is correctly established at 80° F (27° C), it
should be between the HOT (upper) reference holes
when the transmission reaches 180° F (82° C). Remember it is best to check the level at the normal
operating temperature.

CAUTION!
If the fluid temperature is below 50°F (10°C) it may
not register on the dipstick. Do not add fluid until
(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)
the temperature is elevated enough to produce an
accurate reading. Run the engine at idle, in PARK, to
warm the fluid.
8. Reinstall the engine cover and snap it down securely
onto the four mounting studs.
9. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake.
NOTE: To prevent dirt and water from entering the
transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make
sure that the dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is
normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from
its fully seated position, as long as its seal remains
engaged in the dipstick tube.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 623

In addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid Fluid Level Check
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the trans- Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
mission is disassembled for any reason.
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
Clutch Hydraulic System (Manual Transmission) — point not more than 3/16 in (4.76 mm) below the bottom
of the hole.
If Equipped
The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated
volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder
reservoir. In the event of leakage or wear, use only the
manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only manufacturer’s recommended manual transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. If the fluid becomes contaminated with
water, it should be changed immediately. Otherwise,
change the fluid as recommended in the Maintenance
Schedule. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

624 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Transfer Case

Adding Fluid

Fluid Level Check

Fluid should be added only at filler hole until fluid
begins to run out of the hole.

The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill
Drain
hole (A) when the vehicle is in a level position.

First remove the fill plug (B), then the drain plug (C). The
recommended tightening torque for the drain and fill
plugs is 15 to 25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).

CAUTION!
When replacing the plugs, do not overtighten them.
You could damage them and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant

Transfer case

Use only manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 625

Front/Rear Axle Fluid

Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion

For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the
exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected.
If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.

Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
Fluid Level Check
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
Lubricant should be at the bottom edge of the oil fill hole. road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
Adding Fluid
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underAdd lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level body protection.
specified above.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
Selection Of Lubricant
resistance built into your vehicle.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

626 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
and Tar Remover to remove.
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
The most common causes are:
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
What Causes Corrosion?

• Stone and gravel impact.

• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.

• Insects, tree sap and tar.

• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.

CAUTION!

• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.

• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 627

• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
packaged and sealed.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and • Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
open.
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
Special Care

touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of • To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
the owner.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

628 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or
Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY
MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used
on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain
this finish.

CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.

Interior Care
Use MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent , then MOPAR® Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent
if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or
Armor All®. Use MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent to
clean vinyl upholstery.

WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable and, if used in
closed areas, they may cause respiratory harm.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 629

CAUTION!
When installing hanging air fresheners in your vehicle, read the installation instructions carefully.
Some air fresheners will damage the finish of
painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly
contact any surface.
Glass Surfaces

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
rag.
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear 2. Dry with a soft cloth.
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do Seat Belt Maintenance
not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
scratch the elements.
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

630 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
CAUTION!
cloth.
To maintain the appearance of your vehicle’s interior
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the trim and top, follow these precautions:
buckles do not work properly.
• Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with the top
down, as exposure to sun or rain may damage interior
WARNING!
trim.
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
• Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching agents on top
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
material, as damage may result.
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do • Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down and dry
on the paint, leaving a streak.
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they • After cleaning your vehicle’s fabric top, always make
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn websure it is completely dry before lowering.
bing, etc.).
• Be especially careful when washing the windows by
following the directions for “Care of Fabric Top Windows.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 631

Washing – Use MOPAR® Car Wash or equivalent, or
mild soap suds, lukewarm water, and a brush with soft
bristles. If extra cleaning is required, use MOPAR®
Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner or equivalent, or a mild
foaming cleaner on the entire top, but support the top
from underneath.
Rinsing – Be sure to remove all traces of cleaner by
rinsing the top thoroughly with clean water. Remember
to allow the top to dry before lowering it.

CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage the top material. Also, increased water pressure
may force past the weather strips.

CAUTION! (Continued)
• It is recommended that the top be free of water
prior to opening it. Operating the top, opening a
door or lowering a window while the top is wet
may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
• Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure
directed at the weather strip seals may cause water
to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
• Careless handling and storage of the removable
roof panels may damage the seals, causing water to
leak into the vehicle’s interior.
• The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

632 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

3. Always rinse thoroughly with cold water, then wipe
with a soft and slightly moist, clean cloth.

Care Of Fabric Top Windows

CAUTION!
Your vehicle’s fabric top has pliable plastic windows
which can be scratched unless special care is taken by
following these directions:
1. Never use a dry cloth to remove dust. Instead, use a
microfiber towel or soft cotton cloth moistened with
cold or warm, clean water, and wipe across the
window, not up and down. MOPAR® Jeep Soft Glass
Window Cleaner or equivalent will safely clean all
plastic windows without scratching. It removes fine
scratches to improve visibility and provides UV protection to help prevent yellowing.
2. When washing, never use hot water or anything
stronger than a mild soap. Never use solvents such as
alcohol or harsh cleaning agents.

4. When removing frost, snow or ice, never use a scraper
or de-icing chemicals. Use warm water only if you
must clean the window quickly.
5. Debris (sand, mud/dirt, dust, or salt) from off-road
driving will have a major impact on zipper operation.
Even normal on-road driving and vehicle washing will
eventually impact window zipper operation. To maintain ease of use of the window zippers, each window
zipper should be cleaned and lubricated regularly. Use
MOPAR® Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or
equivalent to ease zipper operation. Before applying,
make sure the zipper teeth are clear of sand, mud, and
other materials. Clean both sides of the zipper, not just
one side. Rinse both zipper halves with fresh water and
allow to dry. Aggressively work the MOPAR® Soft Top
Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or equivalent into the
zipper teeth. If a stuck zipper slide is experienced, work

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 633

the MOPAR® Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or
equivalent into the zipper slide. Several applications
may be required before the zipper comes free.
6. Never paste stickers, gummed labels or any tape to the
windows. Adhesives are hard to remove and may
damage the windows.
FUSES

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.

• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

634 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Totally Integrated Power Module
The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, mini fuses and relays. A label that
identifies each component is printed on the inside of the
cover.

Totally Integrated Power Module

Cavity
J1
J2
J3
J4

Cartridge Fuse
–
30 Amp Pink
–
25 Amp Clear

Mini Fuse
–
–
–
–
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Description
–
Transfer Case Module
–
Driver Door Node

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 635

Cavity
J5
J6

Cartridge Fuse
25 Amp Clear
40 Amp Green

Mini Fuse
–
–

30 Amp Pink

–

J8
J9
J10

–
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink

–
–
–

J11
J12
J13
J14
J15
J17

30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
60 Amp Yellow
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green

–
–
–
–
–
–
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Description
Passenger Door Node
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Pump/
Stability Control System
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Valve/
Stability Control System
–
PZEV Sec Motor/Flex Fuel
Headlamp Wash Relay/Manifold Tuning
Valve
Sway Bar
Rear Blower Motor/Radiator Fan
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) – Main
Rear Defroster
Front Blower
Starter Solenoid

636 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
J18
J19
J20
J21
J22
M1

Cartridge Fuse
20 Amp Blue
60 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
–
–

Mini Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
15 Amp Blue

M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
M9

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
2 Amp Grey
25 Amp Clear
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Description
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Trans Range
Radiator Fan
Front Wiper LO/HI
Front/Rear Washer
Spare
Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL)/
Switch Stop Lamp Feed
Relay Trailer Lighting (Stoplamp)
Frt/Rear Axle Locker Relay
Clock Spring
Power Inverter – If Equipped
Power Outlet #1/Rain Sensor
Power Outlet #2 (BATT/ACC SELECT)
Front Heated Seat
Rear Heated Seat – If Equipped

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 637

Cavity
M10

Cartridge Fuse
–

Mini Fuse
15 Amp Blue

M11

–

10 Amp Red

M12
M13

–
–

30 Amp Green
20 Amp Yellow

M14
M15

–
–

20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Description
Ignition Off Draw – Vehicle Entertainment System, Satellite Digital Audio Receiver (SDARS),
DVD, Hands-Free Module, RADIO, Antenna,
Universal Garage Door Opener, Vanity Lamp
(Ignition Off Draw) Climate Control System,
Underhood Lamp
Amplifier
Ignition Off Draw – Cabin Compartment
Node, Wireless Control Module, SIREN,
Multifunction Control Switch
Trailer Tow (Export Only)
Climate Control System, Rear View Mirror,
Cabin Compartment Node, Transfer Case
Switch, Multi-Function Control Switch, Tire
Pressure Monitor, Glow Plug Module –
Export Diesel Only

638 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
M16
M17
M18
M19
M20

Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–

Mini Fuse
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
25 Amp Clear
15 Amp Blue

M21
M22
M23
M24
M25
M26

–
–
–
–
–
–

20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
25 Amp Clear
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red

M27
M28

–
–

10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Description
Airbag Module
Left Tail/License/Park Lamp
Right Tail/Park/Run Lamp
Auto Shut Down (ASD #1 and #2)
Cabin Compartment Node Interior Light,
Switch Bank
Auto Shut Down (ASD #3)
Right Horn (HI/LOW)
Left Horn (HI/LOW)
Rear Wiper
Fuel Pump, Diesel Lift Pump – Export Only
Power Window Switch, Driver Window
Switch
Ignition Switch Feed, Wireless Module
Powertrain Control Module

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 639

Cavity
M29
M30
M31
M32
M33
M34

Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–

Mini Fuse
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red

M35
M36
M37

–
–
–

10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red

M38

–

25 Amp Clear

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Description
Powertrain
Wiper Motor Frt, J1962 Diagnostic Feed
Backup Lamps
Airbag Controller, TT EUROPE
Powertrain Controller
Park Assist, Climate Control System, Headlamp Wash, Compass
Heated Mirrors
Power Outlet
Anti-Lock Brake System, Electronic Stability
Control, Stop Lamp Switch, Fuel Pump Relay
Lock/Unlock Motors

640 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

VEHICLE STORAGE

CAUTION!
• When installing the Integrated Power Module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.

If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days, you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
You may:
• Remove Cartridge fuse #J13 in the Power Distribution
Center (PDC) labeled Ignition-Off Draw (IOD) and
store it in a safe location within the PDC.
• Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.

• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 641

REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Automatic Transmission Indicator Lamp
Heater Control Lamps (2)
Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp (Rear Window Defogger, and Rear Wash/Wipe)
Soundbar Dome Lamp
** Bulbs only available from authorized dealer.

Bulb Number
658
194
**
912

Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
H13
3157NA
168
PSX24W

Headlamps (2)
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2)
Front Side Marker Lamps (2)
Fog Lamps
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

642 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Bulb Number
3157
L.E.D.
3157
194

Rear Stop/Tail/Turn Lamps (2)
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
Backup Lamps (2)
License Lamp

NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your local authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
BULB REPLACEMENT

Headlamp

NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo- 1. Open hood and support using prop rod.
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
2. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers along the
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
top 1/4 turn counterclockwise and remove.
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
3. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side
and working toward the other.
4. Turn both park and turn signal socket assemblies 1/4
turn counterclockwise and remove.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 643

5. Remove the four screws holding the metal retaining 12. Reinstall bulb housing. Rotate the bulb 1/4 turn
ring.
clockwise.
6. Remove the lamp from the collar.

Front Park/Turn Signal

7. Grasp the bulb and turn 1/4 turn counterclockwise.

1. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers along the
top 1/4 turn counterclockwise and remove.

8. Pull the bulb from the housing.
9. Push connector locking tab to the unlock position.
10. Remove connector from bulb.
11. Push connector onto new bulb base, and push the
connector locking tab to the lock position.

2. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side
and working toward the other.
3. Turn the socket assembly 1/4 turn counterclockwise
and remove from housing. Pull the bulb straight from
the socket to replace.
Front Side Marker

CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.

1. Reach under the front fender flare and locate the front
side marker socket.
2. Turn the socket assembly counterclockwise 1/3 turn
and remove it from the housing. Pull the bulb straight
from the socket to replace.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

644 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Front Fog Lamp

Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lamp

1. Reach under the vehicle to access the back of the front 1. Remove the two inboard screws attaching the tail light
fog lamp.
housing to the body. DO NOT REMOVE THE OUTBOARD SCREWS AT ANY TIME.
2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the front
fog lamp connector receptacle.
3. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latch features and
squeeze them together to unlock the bulb from the
back of the front fog lamp housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in
the housing and then connect the replacement bulb.

CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Inboard Screw Location

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 645

2. Separate the housing from the body by pushing the Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
lamp inboard while pulling the lamp away from the The stop lamp is mounted on a bracket that extends
body.
upward from the tailgate behind the spare tire. If service
3. Rotate the appropriate socket 1/4 turn counterclock- is needed, obtain the LED/Cover Assembly from your
local authorized dealer.
wise, then remove it from the housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace.

1. Remove the spare tire.
2. Remove the four screws holding the lens/cover in
place on the spare tire carrier.
3. Disconnect the wire harness from the back of the LED
cover.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

646 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
Two Door Models
18.6 Gallons
Four Door Models
22.5 Gallons
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L Engine
6 Quarts
Cooling System *
10.5 Quarts
3.6L Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000
Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Metric
70 Liters
85 Liters
5.6 Liters
9.9 Liters

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 647

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant

Engine Oil

Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20
Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®,
and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter or
equivalent.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs.
87 Octane
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

648 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.

• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 649

Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped

Manual Transmission – If Equipped

Transfer Case
Axle Differential (Front)

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4® fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission. We recommend
MOPAR® ATF+4® fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Manual Transmission Lubricant meeting the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-9224.
We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 80W-90) (API GL-5).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

650 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Component
Axle Differential (Rear)

Brake Master Cylinder

Power Steering Reservoir

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
226 RBI (Model 44) – We recommend you use MOPAR®
Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 80W-90) (API GL-5) or
equivalent. For trailer towing, use MOPAR® Synthetic
Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W-140). Models
equipped with Trac-Lok™ require an additive.
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 Brake Fluid,
SAE J1703. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid
+4, MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654 N
C
E

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
! MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .652

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

652 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
scheduled maintenance.
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as referring to the steps described under “Instrument Clusfrequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ter Descriptions” or “Electronic Vehicle Information Cenambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence ter (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message for further information.
is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change interchange oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as
whichever comes first.
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) equipped Severe Duty All Models
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
EVIC and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This
change is necessary.
type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 653 M

Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level

• Check windshield washer fluid level

• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering and automatic transmission, and fill as needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Required Maintenance Intervals.

Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
• Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped
with dipstick
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
• Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
• Inspect all door latches for presence of grease,
reapply if necessary.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E

654 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

Or Years:
Or Kilometers:

Maintenance Chart

Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, and replace if necessary.
Inspect the front and rear axle
fluid.
Inspect the brake linings, replace
as necessary

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)

32,000

Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.

X
X

X
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

X
X

Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four wheel disc
brakes.
Inspect transfer case fluid.
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Replace air conditioning/cabin air
filter.
Replace spark plugs **

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Or Years:
Or Kilometers:

20,000

Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)

32,000

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 655 M

X
X

X
X
X

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

X
X

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) whichever
comes first.
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer
towing.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

M 656 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
Mileage or time passed
N
(whichever comes first)
T
E
N
Or Years:
A
Or
Kilometers:
N
C
E

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Change the manual transmission
fluid if using your vehicle for any
of the following: trailer towing,
snow plowing, heavy loading,
taxi, police, delivery service
(commercial service), off-road,
desert operation or more than
50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot
weather, above 90°F (32°C).
Change transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or
frequent trailer towing.

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Or Years:
Or Kilometers:

20,000

Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)

32,000

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 657 M

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

8
X

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

M 658 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
Mileage or time passed
N
(whichever comes first)
T
E
N
Or Years:
A
Or
Kilometers:
N
C
E

S Inspect and replace PCV valve if
C necessary.
H Change front and rear axle fluid
E if using your vehicle for police,
X
D taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent
U trailer towing.
L
E ** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
S

yearly intervals do not apply.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 659 M

WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
! SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663

▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665

▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .663

▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665

▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663 ! WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .666
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .663 ! MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
! IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663 ! REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .667
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .664

▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .667

▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .664

▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667

▫ In Mexico Contact:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665 ! PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .668

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

662 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

! DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669

▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 663

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment

Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.

If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

664 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (877) 426–5337
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
P.O. Box 1621
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen- Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
ter should include the following information:
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 665

Mexico, D. F.

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.

In Mexico City: 5081-7568

Service Contract

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).

In Mexico Contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

666 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.

WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 667

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
dealer, and the manufacturer.
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),
operating at its best.
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: AdminREPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
other information about motor vehicle safety from
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could http://www.safercar.gov.
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety In Canada
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
manufacturer.
should contact the Customer Service Department immeIf NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Transa group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
MOPAR® PARTS

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

668 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acdiagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC veIncluded are starting, operating, emergency and maintehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 669

Call toll free at:

Treadwear

• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.

• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or

Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

670 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX

10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

672 INDEX

About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .614
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Air Bag
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Air bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Air bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Air bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Air bag Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .591
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Antenna, Satellite Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Assistance Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX 673

Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .404
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .183
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Axle Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .27
Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

674 INDEX

Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .310
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Child Restraints

Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . .91
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint . . . . .90
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Locating The LATCH Anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .83
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .79
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX 675

Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . .
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Computer, Trip/Travel. . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . .
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.397
.505
.322
.325
.324
.321

Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
. . . . .389 Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
. . . . .389 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
. . . . .189 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663
. . . . .189
. . . . .665 Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
. . . . .615 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
. . . . .611 Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
. . . . .614 Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
. . . . .646 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
. . . . .616 Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
. . . . .616 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584

10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

676 INDEX

Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Disarming, Security System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors . . . . . .42
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449

Dual Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . .
Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . .
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . .
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) .
Emergency Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency, In Case of
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.183
.183
.113
.469
.471
.476
.471
.476
.179
.477
.321
.321
.466

. . . . .563
. . . . .570
. . . . .575

INDEX 677

Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .585
Engine
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560

Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Exhaust System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Fabric Care. . . . . . . . .
Fabric Top . . . . . . . . .
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . .
Air Conditioning . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Disposal

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.591
.413
.591
.590

678 INDEX

Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . .
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . .
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fold and Tumble Rear Seat . . . . . . .
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folding Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.560
.103
.170
.422
.649
.646
.103
.625
.588
.623
.465
.647
.170
.644
.161
.163
.291
.560

Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . .
Four Wheel Drive Operation
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . .
Front Axle (Differential). . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . .
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials Added . . . . . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . .
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . .
Requirements . . . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . .
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . .
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.441
.441
.574
.625
.525
.530
.528
.526
.526
.530
.525
.306
.528
.526
.525
.525
.647
.646
.530

INDEX 679

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633

GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532

Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . .
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . .
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . .
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Select Lever Override .
General Information . . . . . .
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . .
Gross Axle Weight Rating . .
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.

Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect®) . . . . . .
Hard Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hard Top, Modular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hard Top Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlights
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.

.530
.526
.525
.526

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.312
.306
.314
.306
.310
.426
.576
.145
.629
.535
.534

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

.
.
.
.
.

.115
.203
.203
.212
.560

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.168
.642
.170
.170
.170
.642
.167
.159
.114
.158
.400

680 INDEX

Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . .
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . .
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . .
Hill Descent Control Indicator
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . .
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.

.424
.309
.485
.485
.472

Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537 iPod®/USB/MP3 Control
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165

Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629

Jacking Instructions .
Jack Location . . . . .
Jack Operation . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . .

.
.
.
.

.566
.564
.563
.570

Key-In Reminder . . .
Keyless Entry System
Key, Programming . .
Key, Replacement . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

.16
.22
.18
.17
.14

INDEX 681

Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Anti-Lock Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
Check Engine (Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . .310
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Electronic Throttle Control Warning . . . . . . . . . .321
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

682 INDEX

Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
Rear Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .306
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Locking Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . .310
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX 683

Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Oil Change Indicator . . . . . .
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Oil Change Indicator, Reset .
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Change Interval . . . . . . .
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . .
Modular Hard Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Identification Logo . . . . .
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Materials Added to . . . . .
MOPAR® Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
Pressure Warning Light . .
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Recommendation . . . . . .
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . .
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . .
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . .
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . .
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Onboard Diagnostic System .
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 Operating Precautions . . . . .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.317
.317
.588
.646
.331
.588
.590
.591
.590
.589
.590
.307
.589
.590
.590
.591
.307
.584
.584

684 INDEX

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Overdrive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Personal Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Pets, Transporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .615
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .494 Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Rear Swing Gate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX 685

Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Rear Wiper/Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . .555
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . .556
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Remote Control
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .396
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . .58

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

686 INDEX

Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .60
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
BeltAlert® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode . . . . . . .63
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Engage The Automatic Locking Mode . . . . . . . . .62
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Fold and Tumble Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .58
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX 687

Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Security System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647
SENTRY KEY®
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Setting the Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer Case
Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555

Transfer Case, Shifting out of Transfer Case
Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

688 INDEX

Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .396
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Storage, Behind the Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Sunrider. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .64
Sway Bar Disconnect, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Swing Gate, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . .
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tip Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire and Loading Information Placard . .
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.310
.404
.312
.178
.421
.493
.487
.103
.508
.498
.510
.563
.505
.498
.501
.500

INDEX 689

Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . .
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . .
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . .
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . .
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.563
.508
.493
.513
.318
.669
.501
.509
.512
.487
.488
.503
.565
.507
.507
.487
.545
.165
.575

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . .
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
Trac-Lok Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . .
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.534
.129
.577
.538
.553
.538
.129
.553
.446
.471
.484
.534
.552
.537
.546
.545
.550
.538
.538

690 INDEX

Transaxle
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Four-Wheel-Drive Operation . . .
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Range Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . .
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trip Odometer Reset Button. . . . . .
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .439
. . . . . . . . . . . .624
. . . . . . . . . . . .649
. . . . . . . . . . . .441
. . . . . . . . . . . .624
. . . . . . . . . . . .619
. . . . . . . . . . . .431
. . . . . . . . . . . .649
. . . . . . . . . . . .424
. . . . . . . . . . . .313
. . . . . . . . . . . .429
Keyless Entry) . .27
. . . . . . . . . . . .507
. . . . . . . . . . . .321
. . . . . . . . . . . .314
. . . . . . . . . . . .313
. . . . . . . . . . . .169

UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Uconnect®
Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Uconnect® 130
Operating Instructions Auxiliary Mode . . . . . . . .371
Operating Instructions Radio Mode . . . . . . . . . .362
Uconnect® 130 With Satellite Radio
Multimedia Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Operating Instructions CD Mode . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Operating Instructions Radio Mode . . . . . . . . . .372
Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Uconnect® (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .389
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX 691

Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495 Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Voice Command
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Windshield, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .306 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Wiper, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297

10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into
this vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity
to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios
and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be
observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made
directly to the battery and fused as close to the
battery as possible. The negative power connection
should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the
negative battery connection. This connection
should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on
the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should
be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases.
Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of
the compass on vehicles so equipped.

The antenna cable should be as short as practical
and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio
to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater
than normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s electronic systems.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Chrysler Group LLC
15WK741-126-AA
15JK72-126-AB

First Edition
Second
Edition
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Printed
Printedin
inU.S.A.
U.S.A

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.6-c015 81.157285, 2014/12/12-00:43:15
Publication Type                :  Owners_Manual
Xpp File Process Date           :  July 7, 2014
Jobnumber                       :  1652458
Operator                        :  schancey
Job Path                        :  Owners_Manual/1652458-en-2015_JEEP_WRANGLER_OM_USA.15JK72-126-AB/Owners_Manual_v3
Checkintocm                     :  Yes
Language                        :  en
Modify Date                     : 2015:06:01 14:44:08-05:00
Create Date                     : 2014:09:12 18:32:59Z
Metadata Date                   : 2015:06:01 14:44:08-05:00
Creator Tool                    : XPP
Keywords                        : 1652458
Producer                        : Mac OS X 10.9.4 Quartz PDFContext
Format                          : application/pdf
Subject                         : 1652458
Description                     : 15JK72-126-AB
Title                           : 2015 Jeep Wrangler (Includes Unlimited) Owner's Manual
Creator                         : 2nd Edition
Instance ID                     : uuid:48ef6f32-3979-466d-9c34-7c2be4be10ad
Document ID                     : uuid:a670bb58-fb3c-410a-9c01-4bd476862116
Page Count                      : 695
Apple Keywords                  : 1652458
Author                          : 2nd Edition
CHECKINTOCM                     :  Yes
JOBNUMBER                       :  1652458
LANGUAGE                        :  en

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

2015 Jeep Wrangler (Includes Unlimited) Owner's Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation